196
PDF generated using the open source mwlib toolkit. See http://code.pediap ress.com/ for more information. PDF generated at: Tue, 30 Jul 2013 16:47:08 PST SN - System Admin Blueprint Study Guide

ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 1/196

PDF generated using the open source mwlib toolkit. See http://code.pediapress.com/ for more information.

PDF generated at: Tue, 30 Jul 2013 16:47:08 PST

SN - System AdminBlueprint Study Guide

Page 2: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 2/196

1

Domain 1

Using Forms

Overview

A form displays information from one record in a data table. The specific information depends on the type of record

displayed. Users can view and edit records in forms. Administrators can customize forms.

The form interface contains the following elements:

€ Title bar: appears at the top of the form and provides navigational and functional controls.

€ Fields: display individual items of data for the record.

€ Sections: group fields under a header. Users may collapse or display sections using tabs.

€ Related links: provide access to additional functions based on record type and system setup. Administrators can

add related links to forms using UI actions.

€ Related lists: display records in another table that have a relationship to the current record. To learn more, see

Using Related Lists.

€ Embedded lists: allow for editing related lists without having to navigate away from the form. Changes are

saved when the form is saved.

€ Response time indicator ( ): appears at the bottom right of some forms to indicate the processing time

required to display the form.

Forms

Title Bar

The title bar displays the title of the

form (table) and provides the following

controls:

€ Back ( ): navigates to the

previously viewed page without

saving changes.

€ Form context menu: appears when

a user points to the arrow ( )

beside the form title or right-clicks

the title bar.

€ Submit or Update: saves changes

and returns to the previously viewed

page.

€ Related actions: provides standard

actions in the form title bar for

some tables, such as Close Incident in incident.

€ Attachments ( ): allows users to view and add attachments to the record. To learn more, see Uploading

Attachments.

€ Previous ( ) and Next ( ): open the previous and next record on the list from which the record was accessed.

These controls save changes to the record.

Page 3: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 3/196

Using Forms 2

€ Toggle tabs ( ): toggles between tabbed and sequential arrangements of related lists and form sections.

Form title bar

Form Context Menu

Form context menu

The form context menu provides controls based on the table and user access

rights. Administrators can customize some of the options available on a

context menu using the Context Menu plugin and UI actions.

Available options include:

€ Save: saves changes without leaving form view.

€ Related actions: provides standard actions in the form context menu for

some tables, such as Create Change in incident.

€ Insert and Insert and Stay: save the data to a new record instead of 

updating the current record. To learn more, see Inserting a Record.

€ Personalize and Templates: provide administrative functions, including

personalizing forms and creating templates.

€ Export: exports data to PDF (or XML, administrators only). To learn

more, see Exporting Data.

€ View: changes fields to a predefined layout. Note that switching views

submits the form, which saves all changes. Administrators can customize

views.

€ Assign Label: adds a link to the record under a custom application label

(new or existing). Labels provide quick access to frequently referenced or urgent information. To learn more, see

Creating and Using Labels.

€ Copy URL: copies to the clipboard the URL for the form view of the record. Follow browser instructions if 

browser security measures restrict this function.

€ Copy sys_id (administrators only): copies to the clipboard the sys_id of the record. Follow browser instructions if 

browser security measures restrict this function.

€ Show XML (administrators only): displays record data in XML format.

€ History (administrators only): displays audit history for the record (must be enabled for the table).

€ Reload Form: reloads information from the database to refresh the form view.

Page 4: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 4/196

Using Forms 3

Fields

A field represents an individual item of data on a record. Users can view and modify field data on a form. Fields may

be configured as:

€ Mandatory: requires a value before users can save the record.

€ Read-only: prevents the current user from editing the field on the form.

€ Standard data entry: accepts values such as numbers, text, choice lists, dates and times, and check boxes.

€ Specialized data entry: accepts one or more of the following:

€ Journal: permits users to enter text. When the record is saved, journal field entries are listed under the input

field, marked with the user name and timestamp (example, Additional comments on an incident).

€ Suggestion: provides the option to include predefined text in a text or journal field.

€ Reference: lets users select a record on another table (example, in an incident, the Caller field references the

User table). Reference fields define a relationship between two tables. When a reference field is populated,

point to the reference icon. ( ) beside the field to preview the referenced record, or click the reference icon

to navigate to the record.

€ Watch List: allows multiple users to subscribe to notifications of a task. A watch list is a common type of glide list , which is a field that allows users to select multiple records from another table.

€ HTML: allows users to use HTML to define how field content renders (example, knowledge article text).

HTML fields can include media elements, such as images, Web links, and videos.

€ Wiki: allows users to use Wiki markup to define how field content renders.

€ Image: permits users to upload an image file (type of .gif, .jpg or .jpeg, or .png only).

€ Video: permits users to upload a video file.

€ Normalized: alters raw input to match standardized values for improved searching and reporting.

€ Currency or Price: accepts monetary information.

€ Translated HTML or Translated Text: are similar to standard HTML or text fields, but can be translated if 

the Internationalization plugin is active.€ Duration: indicates a length of time. The field automatically converts hours to days for values greater than 24

hours. For example, 30 hours is converted to 1 day and 6 hours.

€ URL: accepts a URL (web) address and creates an active hyperlink.

See Introduction to Fields for more detailed information on fields.

Field Status Indicator

Field Status Indicators

A field status indicator is a colored bar that

may appear to the left of form elements.

Administrators can customize the colors of field status indicators. These indicators

convey the following statuses:

€ Mandatory: required field that is empty.

The user must enter a value to save the

form. Default color is red.

€ Populated Mandatory: required field

for which a value has already been saved

in the database. Default color is light red.

If the user enters a new value, the field

status indicator changes to Modified (default green).

€ Modified: contains data that has not been saved. Default color is green.

Page 5: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 5/196

Using Forms 4

€ Read-only: user cannot edit on the form. Default color is orange.

Sections

Sections provide headers for a group of related fields.

€ To expand or collapse a section, click expand ( ) or collapse ( ) in the section header.€ To toggle between tabbed and sequential arrangements of sections, click Toggle tabs ( ).

Embedded Lists

Some forms may show related lists as embedded. Changes to embedded lists are saved when the form is saved (see

Editing in Forms).

Use these controls to work with an embedded list:

€ To expand or collapse an embedded list, click expand ( ) or collapse ( ) in the list header.

€ To add a new row, double-click Insert a new row...

€ To edit a row, double-click in an empty area of the field. See Using the List Editor.

€ To delete a row, click Delete ( ) beside the row.

€ New rows are removed immediately.

€ Existing rows are designated for deletion when the record is saved. To clear this designation, click Delete

again.

Embedded list

Navigating to a Form

Users can navigate to a blank form to

create a new record, or to an existing

record form.

To open a blank form for a new record,

use one of these methods:

€ Open a list (example, Incident for a

new incident), and click New.

€ In the navigation filter, type the

table name followed by .form.

€ Append the table name and .do to the instance web address. For example, the following URL opens a new

Incident form:

https://<instance name>.service-now.com/incident.do

To open an existing record in form view, use one of these methods:

€ Locate the record in a list and click the record number or the reference icon. To learn more, see Navigating

Applications and Using Record Lists.

€ Append the table name, followed by .do?sysparm_query=number= and the record number to the instance web

address. For example, the following URL opens incident INC0000007:

https://<instance name>.service-now.com/incident.do?sysparm_query=number=INC0000007

Additional record parameters can be applied with a URL. To learn more, see Navigating by URL.

Page 6: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 6/196

Using Forms 5

Editing in Forms

To edit a record in form view:

1. Navigate to the form.

2. Enter appropriate data.

3. Save the record using one of these methods:

€ Click Submit or Update to save changes and return to the previously viewed page.

€ Right-click the title bar and select Save to save changes without leaving form view.

€ Right-click the title bar and select Insert or Insert and Stay to save the data to a new record instead of 

updating the current record (see Inserting a Record).

4. If the record has been changed by another user since you opened it, an alert may appear. Click OK to confirm

your changes.

This alert is generated by the Simultaneous Update Alert  client script.

Alert

Note:  Depending on system setup, the data entered in a form may affect other options on the form or change its appearance. For 

example, if you select a status of Closed for an incident, a Close Notes field may appear and may be required to save the record.

 Administrators can create custom form effects in a variety of ways, including UI policies and client scripts.

Inserting a Record

Insert provides a method for creating multiple similar items, such as email notifications, users, groups, or business

rules. Administrators may also enable the Insert function for task records.

To insert a record:

1. Open a similar item.

2. Edit the item and give it a new Name.

3. Click one of the following:

€ Insert saves the item as a new record and returns to the previously viewed page.

€ Insert and Stay saves and views the new record.

Page 7: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 7/196

Using Forms 6

Insert

Cancelling Changes

To cancel changes to a form, navigate away

from the form view without saving the

record. If a message appears, click Leave

this Page to confirm cancellation.

Note:  Administrators can disable the confirmation message by setting theglide.ui.dirty_form_support  property to

false.

Confirm cancellation

Page 8: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 8/196

Personalizing Forms 7

Personalizing Forms

Overview

Administrators and users with the form_admin role can customize the layout for any form view.

Personalizing Forms

To personalize a form:

1. Right-click the form header and select Personalize > Form Layout.

2. Using the slushbucket, select the fields and the order in which you wish them to appear.

€ Available items that appear in green followed by a plus (+) sign represent related tables. To access fields on

these tables, use dot-walking.

3. Click Save.

Page 9: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 9/196

Personalizing Forms 8

Personalize form

Configuring Insert for

Task Records

The "Save", "Insert", and "Insert and

Stay" options are disabled by defaultfor task records (e.g., Incidents,

Change Requests).

To configure these options for task 

records:

1. Navigate to System Properties >

UI Properties.

2. Locate the property Allow the use

of the "Insert" and "Insert and

Stay" options on task derived

tables. (glide.ui.task.insert )

3. Select the check box to enable or

clear the check box to disable

(default) the options for tasks.

UI Properties

Adding a Related List

Related lists display records in another

table that have a relationship with the

current record. Administrators canconfigure related lists to appear on forms (and in hierarchical lists, with List v2 plugin).

To add a related list to a form:

1. Open the form.

2. Right-click the header and select "'Personalize"' > Related Lists.

3. Using the slushbucket, select the related list to display on the form.

Related lists appear at the bottom of the form.

Related lists

Page 10: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 10/196

Personalizing Forms 9

Customer Updates Indicator

Customer Update Indicator

The customer updates indicator ( ) may

appear on the header of forms that have

customer updates. Customer updates are

changes that are tracked by update sets, such

as scripts, service catalog items, and other

configuration tables. For the full list, see

List of Tracked Customizations.

Clicking the customer updates indicator

opens the update set records for the item.

Configuration

Administrators can configure this indicator to appear for all or for specific administrators using the

owned_by_indicator.form user preference.

To configure the preference, navigate to User Administration > User Preferences.

€ To enable it for all administrators, ensure the owned_by_indicator.form preference is set to true.

€ To enable it for an individual administrator only, leave the owned_by_indicator.form preference set to false

(default) and then create a new user preference with the following values:

€ Name: owned_by_indicator.form

€ User: <administrator for which to enable the preference>

€ Value: true

User Preference

TutorialsThe following video demonstrates

personalizing forms. For more

e-Learning videos, see Tutorials.

Personalizing Forms Video[1]

References[1] http:/   /  link. videoplatform. limelight. com/  media/  ?mediaId=7e485a42e4a349c899c36a6077fe0e30& width=480&  height=321&

playerForm=d286c3052c63466aa61efcdb7ef1ef1f 

Page 11: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 11/196

Personalizing Lists 10

Personalizing Lists

Overview

ServiceNow lets users with the personalize_list role (including administrators) personalize the columns in any list to

show only the desired information. You can add or remove fields (columns) from a list or change the order in which

the fields appear in the list. You can hide controls and define access conditions by role to existing controls. To

personalize a list, bring up the list, right-click the list's header bar, and select Personalize. This opens a cascading

menu with the following list options:

€ List Layout

€ List Calculations

€ List Control

Note:  Personalizing a list in this way modifies the list for all users. To make changes to a list that are only visible to you, see

Creating Personal Lists.

Page 12: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 12/196

Personalizing Lists 11

Enhancements

Calgary

The Calgary release adds this enhancement:

€ A new list control option allows administrators to disable the link to the record from the first column in list view.

List Layout

To change the default columns for a list view:

1. Open the list in the view you wish to modify.

For example, to modify the incident mobile view, navigate to Incident > Open and select View > Mobile

from the context menu.

2. Right-click the header and select Personalize > List Layout.

3. Use the slushbucket to select the columns and the order in which you wish them to appear.

The first non-reference field automatically links to the form view of the record. For this reason, consider using

the record number as the first column in the list layout.

Note:  If you personalize a list and then change the default columns for the list view, you do not see the changes until you reset your 

 personal list to column defaults.

Personalize List Layout

Adding Extended Fields

to Base Table Lists

Administrators can configure whether

fields on extended tables can be added

to base table lists. For example, when

this feature is enabled, you can view

and filter on the caller_id field (from

the incident table) on a Task table list

(such as the My Work list).

1. Navigate to System Properties >

UI Properties.

2. Locate the property Allow base

table lists (task, cmdb_ci, etc.) to

include extended table fields

(incident_state, os_version, etc.),

and allow filtering on extended

table fields

(glide.ui.list.allow_extended_fields).

3. Select the check box to enable extended fields on base table lists. Clear the check box to disable the feature.

4. Click Save.

Page 13: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 13/196

Personalizing Lists 12

List Calculations

In a record list, right-click in a numeric field you want to evaluate, and then select  Personalize > List Calculations.

A dialog box appears, enabling you to view minimum and maximum calculations for that field for all the records in

the list. To see both the minimum and maximum calculations displayed, select both check boxes. The totals appear in

the column you selected, below the last record in the list.

List Control

A number of elements in a list can be personalized, such as control buttons and filters. Right-click in the header bar

of the list and select Personalize > List Control from the pop-up menu. The following List Control form appears:

This form provides the following fields:

 Field Description

Name View the name of the primary file for the list or related list. This is automatically set by the system.

Related List View the name of the table and field that define the related list. This is automatically set by the system.

Label Enter the label you would like for this list. Allows an admin to customize the label for a related list or list. If not supplied the

default plural label for the file is used. For example, the label for the incident file would be Incidents.

Omit new

button

Select the check box to prevent the New button from displaying on this list. Clear this check box if you want the New button to

appear on this form, or if you want to control the New button with roles (New roles field).

Omit edit

button

Select the check box to prevent the Edit button from displaying on this list. Clear this check box if you want the Edit button to

appear on this form, or if you want to control the Edit button with roles (New roles field). Note that the Edit button does not apply

to all lists.

Omit if empty Select the check box to omit the Related List from the form entirely (no header) if there are no entries for the Related List.

Omit columns

if empty

Select the check box for a top-level list to omit the column headers AND filters/breadcrumbs for an empty list.

Omit filters Select the check box to display filters or breadcrumbs for this list. Clear this check box if you always want filters or breadcrumbs

or if you want to control filters/breadcrumbs with roles (Filter roles field).

Page 14: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 14/196

Personalizing Lists 13

Omit links Select the check box if you want links for fields that reference other files in this list. Leave this button unchecked if you always

want links to be generated or if you want to control the use of links with roles (Link roles field).

Omit

drill-down link 

Select the check box to disable the link to the record from the first column in list view. Users can still click the reference icon to

access the record (Calgary release).

Hierarchical

lists

Inserts a hierarchical list into a record list. This enables a user to view the contents of a record's related lists without leaving the

record list form.

List edit type Controls the ability of a user to edit values directly in individual cells in a list. The options are:

€ Save immediately (cell edit mode): enables cell editing. The entire row is saved as soon as the user enters a new value.

€ Save data by rows: enables cell editing. The row is saved only when the user navigates away from the row or clicks the Save (

 ) button. This mode allows the user to modify multiple values before saving a record.

€ Disable list editing: prevents users from editing cells in the list.

List edit tag Enter an arbitrary string of letters or numbers to create a unique tag that is sent to a reference qualifier as the script variable

listEditRefQualTag.

List edit insert

row

Select the check box to enable or clear the check box to disable the ability for a user to create new records in list view. When it is

enabled, an empty row appears at the bottom of the list.

Insert a new row (record)

New roles Specify the user roles required to have the New button appear on this list. Click the padlock icons to open the role selection lists.

Filter roles Specify the user roles required to have the filter appear in the list. Click the padlock icons to open the role selection lists.

Edit roles Specify the user roles required to have the Edit button appear in the list. Click the padlock icons to open the role selection lists.

Link roles Specify the user roles required to have links generated for fields that reference other files. Click the padlock icons to open the role

selection lists.

Example

In the following example, we will personalize a list of related incidents embedded in a problem record to suit

specific business needs.

In this example, we will configure the label to say Child Incidents rather than just Incidents, and remove the New

button to prevent users from creating new incidents from this form.

1. Right-click in the header bar of the embedded Incidents list and select Personalize > List Control.

2. In the List Control form change the Label field in the List Control record to Child Incidents.

3. Check the Omit new button check box.

4. Click Submit to save your changes and return to the previous record, in this case, the problem record.

Page 15: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 15/196

Personalizing Lists 14

In the problem record, the label for the embedded incident list has changed, and the New button is no longer

available.

 ]

Advanced Control

There are also script fields that can be personalized and placed on the List Control form so that you can write a script

to indicate if the various elements (links, filters, new and edit buttons, empty) should be present or not. These scripts

can react to the record that is being displayed. For related list controls the parent record is identified by the global

variable 'parent'. For primary lists, there is no parent record.The following example script could be used on the 'Affected CIs' related list to only show the 'Edit' button if the

parent task was active. This script would need to be placed in the 'Edit condition' script field when personalizing the

list control for the related list.

var answer;

if(parent.active == true){

  //Do not remove the 'Edit' button

  answer=false;

}

else{

  //Remove the 'Edit' button

  answer=true;

}

answer;

Page 16: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 16/196

Personalizing Lists 15

Personalize List UI Actions

The Personalize List UI Action opens the slushbucket interface in the list view from System UI > Views or System

UI > Lists. The UI Action table entry is displayed below, followed by a text section. Copy and paste this into a

record to create this action on your system, if it does not already exist. This UI Action allows for the customization

of lists using the normal slushbucket interface, rather than the direct manipulation of records.

var url = "slushbucket.do?sysparm_form=list&sysparm_list="  + 

current.name + "&sysparm_view=" + current.view.name;

url += "&sysparm_collection=" + current.parent + 

"&sysparm_collection_relationship="  + current.relationship;

url += "&sysparm_referring_url=sys_ui_view.do?sys_id="  + 

current.view.toString();

action.setRedirectURL(url);

Page 17: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 17/196

Creating New Fields 16

Creating New Fields

Overview

Administrators can easily add new fields to the database dictionary to track new information. After creating new

fields, administrators can add the fields to forms and lists by personalizing forms.

Creating New Fields

To add a new field to a table:

1. Navigate to the form view of the table.

2. Right-click the form and select Personalize > Form Layout.

3. In the Create new field section, enter the name of the field and select the field type.

4. Click Add.

5. Use the slushbucket to place the field in the desired location on the form.

6. Click Save.

The field now appears on the form in the correct location.

Page 18: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 18/196

Creating New Fields 17

Making a Field Mandatory

Fields can be marked as mandatory, meaning they must contain a value. Mandatory fields are marked with a

vertical red bar before the label. A mandatory field that is prepopulated by the platform with default data, such as a

value from a client script, does not display the red indicator. If you delete this value from the field, however, the red

indicator appears.

To mark a field as mandatory:

1. Right-click the field's label in the form and select Personalize Dictionary.

2. In the Dictionary form, select the Mandatory check box.

3. Click Update.

The next time the form is opened, a red bar appears next to the field label, indicating that a value is mandatory.

Note:  Mandatory fields are global. The field is marked as mandatory everywhere it appears in a form.

Page 19: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 19/196

Creating New Fields 18

Mandatory Reference Fields

A form can be saved with an empty mandatory field, if that field is a reference field (derived from another table) and

if the parent field is also blank. However, if the mandatory reference field shows a value from the parent field, then

the form cannot be saved if this value is deleted. It is important to note that if the value in the referenced field is

changed, the value for that field is changed everywhere it appears.

Specifying a Default Value

A Default Value populates a value in a field when a new record is created. Default values can be specified as either

a constant, or generated through script.

To set a default value on a field:

1. Right-click the field's label in the form and select Personalize Dictionary.

2. Enter the default value in the default_value field.

To set a constant value, simply type it into the "default_value" text box field. To assign a default value using a more

complex formula, use JavaScript to output a default value.Note: The default value should be the underlying value that would be present in the field, not the label. For example,

in a choice list field, use the value of the choice as the default value, not the choice's name.

Constant default values

Here is an example that sets a default value for the Priority field.

Javascript Default Values

To view out-of-box examples of JavaScript default values, navigate to System Definition > Dictionary with the

following filter:

Page 20: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 20/196

Creating New Fields 19

Example: Set a Default Value for assignment_group

The following example sets a default value in a sys_user_group Reference field by getting the ID from the name of a

group:

javascript:GetIDValue('sys_user_group', 'Development');

Example: Set a default value for assigned_to if user has the itil role

This example shows a default value, defined in script, that sets the assigned_to value equal to the current user id if 

the user has a role of itil:

Example: Set a default value for a duration field

To set a default value for a duration field, use the following in the Default value field of the duration field's

dictionary entry:

javascript:current.duration_field.setDisplayValue('3 04:30:14');

Typically, it is best not to hard-code a particular date-time because if the system date-time format changes, the value

will be invalid.

Making a Field Dependent

A Choice or Reference field can be declared dependent on another field on the same table. Dependent fields limit

their available values based on the value in the dependent field.

If a required dependency does not function as expected, as might happen if there is a many-to-many relationship

between the fields, consider using reference qualifiers to accomplish the goal.

To make a field dependent:

1. Right-click the field's label in the form and select Personalize Dictionary.

2. In the dependent field, enter the name of the field that this field will depend on.3. Click "Update" when done.

Page 21: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 21/196

Creating New Fields 20

In the example below, the "subcategory" field is made dependent on "category". The "category" value in a form will

determine which options appear for the "subcategory" field.

 Note: Fields cannot be made dependent on derived fields.

Requiring Unique Values for a Field

It is possible to specify that a field's values be unique. When this is done, the system will not let two records have the

same value for that field. By default, fields are created without this constraint.

A field can only require unique values if there are not already duplicate values in the database for that field.

To enforce uniqueness on a field:

1. Right-click the field's label in the form and select Personalize Dictionary.

2. Personalize the Form to add the Unique field if it does not already appear.

3. Check the Unique field checkbox.

4. Update.

Page 22: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 22/196

Creating a Custom Application 21

Creating a Custom Application

Overview

Administrators can use the app creator to develop custom applications that meet business needs. After defining the

business requirements and the data model, create the application:

1. Create an application record in the Applications [sys_app] table.

2. Select it as the current application, and begin developing the application.

3. Use the app creator to help manage development. As necessary, you can:

€ Resolve conflicts between applications under development.

€ Move application files manually between applications.

€ Delete or restore configuration records.

When the application is developed and tested, you are ready to transfer it to another instance. See Publishing

Applications.

Creating Applications

1. Navigate to System Applications > Create Application.

2. Define the application by completing the fields on the form (see table).

3. Click Submit. The application record remains open.

€ The application record is saved and now appears on the Applications list.

€ An application file record for the application record is created and assigned to the application. The application

file appears in the All Files related list.

€ The application is selected as the current application in the Application picker.

 Field Description

Name Defines the name that identifies the application record.

Active Select the check box to indicate that the application is in use (default). Clear the check box to deactivate the application.

Short

description

Provides an explanation of what this application does. When you publish the application for transfer to another instance, this field is

the default description for the update set. See Publishing Applications.

Menu Specifies the primary menu, which is the default application menu for any modules created in this application (see Administering

Application Menus and Modules). It is populated automatically based on the application name.

[Optional] Edit the new menu name or select an existing menu.

Note:

€ If the menu name does not match an existing menu, a new menu is created when you save changes to the application record.

€ You can modify this field for an existing application to create a new menu or select another existing menu. The default user role

is applied to the new menu. The original menu record is not changed.

User role Specifies the default user role required for the primary menu and to access any tables created in this application (see Creating

Security Rules for Tables). It is populated automatically based on the application name.

[Optional] Edit the new role name or select an existing role.

Note:

€ If the user role does not match an existing role, a new role is created when you save changes to the application record.

€ You can modify this field for an existing application to create a new role or select another existing role. The role is applied to

the primary menu. The original role is not changed.

Page 23: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 23/196

Creating a Custom Application 22

Application record

Defining Tables for

Applications

Build the data model you designed for

the application by creating custom

tables.

1. Navigate to System Applications

> Applications.

2. Open the application record.

3. Scroll to the Tables related list.

4. [Optional] Create a table by editing

the list.

When you create a table with the

list editor, a new list module is

automatically created for it. Themodule appears in the application navigator under the primary menu for the application. If the primary menu is

not defined, then a new menu is created, named with the table label.

5. Open a table record or click New to create a new table.

6. Define the table and columns by completing the form. See Creating a Custom Table.

Note:  If you create a new table with the same name as a deleted table, the new table is associated with the application of the deleted 

table instead of the current application. To avoid conflicts, use a unique name for the new table. You can still use the same label.

Activating and Deactivating Applications

To activate an application:

1. Navigate to System Applications > Applications.

2. Click All in the breadcrumbs to remove the default active = true filter condition and display both active and

inactive applications.

3. Open the application record.

4. Select the Active check box and click Update.

€ All associated menus, modules, and ACLs are set as active.

€ You can selectively deactivate application menus, modules, and ACLs after you activate the application.

To deactivate an application:

1. Navigate to System Applications > Applications.

2. Open the application record.

3. Clear the Active check box and click Update.

€ All associated menus, modules, and ACLs are set as inactive.

€ Users cannot access the application tables from the application navigator or by navigating directly to the table.

€ You can create new menus, modules, and ACLs, but you cannot set them as active.

Page 24: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 24/196

Creating a Custom Application 23

Working on Applications

Select the current application to associate configuration records with it as you develop.

1. Select the desired application in the Application picker. When you create a new application, it is automatically

selected as the current application.

Applications picker

2. Create a new or make a change to

an existing configuration record.

€ For a new record, the application

file is automatically assigned to

the selected application. If a

conflict is detected, a notification

appears.

€ For an existing record, the application file is not assigned or moved to the selected application. If the record is

not already associated with the selected application, a conflict notification appears.

3. If a conflict notification appears, resolve the conflict.

Resolving Conflicts

A conflict may exist when application files that normally belong together are not assigned to the same application. A

notification appears when the application file you changed or its parent is not assigned to the application selected in

the Application picker. For example, a conflict is detected in this scenario.

€ Table A is associated with Application A.

€ Application B is selected in the Application picker.

€ You create a new field on Table A.

To resolve conflicts, choose an action for each conflict that is detected.

€ To move the application files to the recommended application, click Move Files.€ To leave the application files where they are, click Leave Alone.

Resolve each conflict

Moving Application Files

to Applications Manually

The most efficient way to build

applications is to select an application

in the Application picker so that new

application files are automatically

assigned to it and you are notified of potential conflicts. However, you can manually assign application files to applications. Use this method to assign

unchanged application files to an application or to move application files from one application to another.

You can move an application file with all of its descendant records (recommended). For example, when you move a

UI policy, also move its UI policy actions. Similarly, when you move a table, also move all the fields and labels on

the table.

1. Navigate to the record in a list or form view (for example, System Definition > UI Policies).

2. For a list, select the check box beside each appropriate row, and then select Move to Application in the Actions

choice list.

3. For a form, right-click the header and select Move To Application.

4. Select an application from the list. The list defaults to the last application you selected.

Page 25: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 25/196

Creating a Custom Application 24

Move application files to an application

5. Click Add.

The application file and all of its

descendant records are moved to

the selected application.

You can also move a single application

file without affecting its descendants.Use this method with caution; if you

move an application file without its

descendants, items may be missing

when you publish the application.

1. Navigate to the record.

2. Right-click the header and select Show Application File.

3. In the Application field, select the desired application.

4. Click Update.

Update the application file record

Creating Update Sets

Use this shortcut to create an empty

update set while you are working on an

application. You can use the update set

to capture any changes; it is not

specific to the application. To create an

update set for the application, see

Publishing Applications.

1. Open the application record.

2. Click the Create New Update Set

related link.

3. Enter a name for the update set.

4. [Optional] Make this the current update set by selecting the check box.

Create a new update set

5. Click Create.

Deleting ApplicationsBy default, deleting an application also

deletes all the records that are

associated with the application, such as

tables, business rules, and menus.

Alternatively, you can deactivate an

application that is no longer in use.

To delete an application:

1. [Recommended] Back up the

application in an update set. See Publishing Applications.2. Navigate to System Applications > Applications.

Page 26: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 26/196

Creating a Custom Application 25

3. Open the application record.

4. Click Delete. A confirmation dialog box indicates the number of application files in the application to be deleted.

Confirm deletion

5. [Optional] Click Show files to

cancel deletion and navigate to a list

of the application files in the

application.

6. [Optional] Clear the check box to

delete only the application record

and not the rest of the records.

7. Click OK.

8. Enter delete and click OK.

The application record is

deleted. If you selected the check box in step 6, all records associated with the application files are deleted.

Application is deleted

To view a list of application files

for deleted records, click the

Show Deleted Files link. You

may be able to restore the

deleted records.

Restoring Deleted

Records

In some cases, you can restore deleted

configuration records. Limitations

include:

€ You cannot restore individual fields

or field labels. You can only restore a deleted table, which restores any fields and labels that were deleted with it.

€ You can only restore records where both the update and version records exist. For example, you cannot restore a

record if you also deleted the update record (see Deleting Update Entries).

To restore an application that you just deleted:

1. On the deleted application confirmation page, click the Show Deleted Files link.

2. Select all of the rows.

Page 27: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 27/196

Creating a Custom Application 26

Restore all application records

3. Select Restore Deleted Record in the action

choice list.

The application and all associated records are

restored.

To restore an older application:

1. Navigate to System Applications > Deleted

Application Files.

2. Locate the application file by filtering on Source

Table is Application and looking for the

application name.

3. Select the check box beside the application file.

4. Select Restore Deleted Record in the action

choice list.

5. Filter the list of deleted application files again on

Application is <the application name>.

6. Select all of the records.

7. Select Restore Deleted Record in the action choice list.

To restore a table:

1. Navigate to System Applications > Deleted Application Files.

2. Locate the table application file by filtering on Source Table is Table and looking for the table name.

3. Select the check box beside the table application file.

4. Select Restore Deleted Record in the action choice list.

The table and all the fields and labels that were deleted with it are restored.

Page 28: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 28/196

Page 29: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 29/196

Administering Application Menus and Modules 28

When you change application menus or modules, the application navigator automatically refreshes to display

the changes.

Modifying Menu Categories

Menu categories allow administrators to change the appearance of application menu labels with CSS styles. Use

styles to make certain application menus stand out.

To define a menu category:

1. Navigate to System Definition > Menu Categories. In versions prior to Calgary, navigate to System Definition

> Application Categories.

2. Click New or open an existing menu category.

3. Define CSS styles in the Style field (for example, border-color, text color, and background-color).

4. [Optional] Enter a Default order. If you create an application without specifying an order, the default order of 

the category is used to determine the relative position in the application navigator. (Calgary release)

To add an application menu to a category, use one of the following methods:

€ In the category record, add the application menu in the Application Menus related list (the Applications related

list in versions prior to Calgary).

€ In the application menu record, enter the category in the Category field.

These menu categories are available by default:

€ Administration: light blue background

border-color: #a7cded; background-color: #e3f3ff;

€ Custom Applications: light background with blue border (Calgary release)

border: 1px solid #96bcdc; background-color: #FBFBFB;

€ Label: dark blue background

border-color: blue; background-color: rgb(102, 153, 204); color: white€ Maint: dark blue background

border-color: blue; background-color: rgb(102, 153, 204); color: white

€ Social IT: dark blue background

border-color: blue; background-color: rgb(102, 153, 204); color: white

Page 30: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 30/196

Administering Application Menus and Modules 29

Creating Application Menus

1. Navigate to System Definition > Application Menus. In versions prior to Calgary, navigate to System

Definition > Applications.

2. Click New.

3. Define the application menu by completing the fields on the form (see table).

Application Menu record

4. Click Submit.

5. Create modules to appear in the

application menu.

Only application menus that

contain modules appear in the

application navigator.

 Field Description

Title Defines the display name of the application menu.

Name Specifies an internal name to uniquely identify application menus that have the same title.

Hint Defines the text that appears in a tooltip when a user points to this application menu.

Active Select the check box to activate the application menu. Only active application menus appear in the application navigator.

Order Defines the relative position of the application menu in the application navigator. If you do not specify an order, the default order of 

the menu category is used.

Category Specifies the menu category, which defines the navigation menu style (default value is Custom Applications).

Roles Specifies user roles to limit who can view the application menu. Otherwise, all users can view the application menu when it is active.

Device

type

Defines whether the application is intended for mobile devices. See Mobile Application Configuration.

Description Provides a more detailed explanation of what this application does.

Creating Modules

1. Open the application menu record by using one of the following methods.

€ Navigate to System Definition > Application Menus and select the application menu from the list. In

versions prior to Calgary, navigate to System Definition > Applications.

€ Right-click the application label in the application navigator and select Edit Application.

2. Scroll down to the Modules related list and click New.

3. Define the module by completing the fields on the form (see table).

4. Click Submit.

Page 31: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 31/196

Administering Application Menus and Modules 30

Field Description

Title Defines the module name. Choose a title that clearly identifies the module.

Order Specifies the order in which the modules appear under the application.

Application

menu

Specifies the name of the application menu under which the module appears. Defaults to the application menu you opened in

step 1.

Hint Defines the tool tip that appears when a user points to the module name.

Active Defines whether the module appears in the application navigator.

Image Specifies an icon to appear next to the module title in the navigator.

Link type Specifies what type of link this module opens. You must specify additional information based on the link type. See Module Link Types.

Roles Restricts module access to the specified roles. If this field is left blank, the module is visible to all users who have access to the

application menu.

Arguments Defines additional information that is required for specific link types. For example, the URL for a link type of URL (from

Arguments:).

Module Link Types

The Link type field specifies what type of link the module opens.

Field Description

Content Page Displays the content page you select in the Content page reference field. See Creating a Content Page.

Homepage Displays the homepage you select in the Homepage reference field.

HTML (from

Arguments:)

Places HTML in the application navigator. This is best used for more complicated links, where a flat URL is not customizable

enough.

Note: You must enter a value for the Arguments field.

List Filter Displays an unpopulated list view for the table you select in the Table field. Allows users to specify a filter without loading the list

first. Use the Filter field to define the default filter for the list. Use the View name field to specify a view.

List of Records Displays the list view for the table you select in the Table field. Use the Filter field to define the default filter for the list. Use the

View name field to specify a view.

Map Page Displays the map page you select in the Map page reference field. See Using Map Pages.

Page 32: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 32/196

Administering Application Menus and Modules 31

New Record Displays a form for creating a new record in the table you select in the Table field. Use the View name field to specify a view.

Run a Report Runs the saved report you select in the Report field.

Script (from

Arguments:)

Runs a script, as defined in the Arguments field.

Note: You must enter a value for the Arguments field.

Search Screen Link that displays a blank form for searching records in the table. Use the View name field to specify a view.

Note:

€ Use the parameter &sysparm_result_view=view_name to define the view the results are rendered in.

€ All searches use a starts with query to search for matching text. Other query types are not supported in search screens.

Separator Creates a division between modules. Enter a name in the Arguments field to add a section name that users can collapse or expand.

Single Record Displays a form for a single record on the table. Use the View name field to specify a view.

Survey Links to the survey you select in the Survey reference field. Use the Survey overwrite check box to determine whether the survey

can be taken multiple times. See Making a Survey Public.

Timeline Page Displays the timeline page you select in the Timeline Page reference field. See Timeline Pages.

URL (from

Arguments:)

Opens any URL, as defined in the Arguments field.

[Optional] Use the Window name field to define a link that opens in a new window.

Note:

€ For internal links, always use a relative link such as ./catalog_home.do?sysparm_view=catalog_default or

catalog_home.do?sysparm_view=catalog_default. Do not use an absolute link to a ServiceNow instance. It creates problems

when you move an update set from a development instance to a production instance because the URL still references the

development instance.

€ You must enter a value for the Arguments field.

Additional Queries

For List of Records link types, you can append additional queries to the module to further define the filter for the

returned list. For example, to filter active incidents that are assigned to the currently logged in user, use the following

argument query:

active=true^assigned_to=javascript:gs.user_id()

Example: URL Module that Opens in New Window

To configure a module to open an external URL in a new browser window:

1. If the Window name field is not displayed, personalize the form and add this field.

2. Select URL (from Arguments) from the Link type list.

3. Add the complete web address to the Arguments field.

4. Select an icon for the module in the Image field.

5. Enter _blank in the Window name field.

If this field is empty, the page opens in the content frame (default behavior).

Page 33: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 33/196

Administering Application Menus and Modules 32

Example: URL Module that Opens a List with a Custom Filter

To create a module that opens a list with a custom filter, sort order, and grouping, use a link type of URL (from

Arguments) and create a link to a custom URL. Use this shortcut to determine the arguments for your custom URL:

1. Navigate to the list by URL, without loading it in the standard interface. For example, navigate to the Incident list

by entering:

<base URL>/incident_list.do

2. Apply the desired filter, sort order, and grouping.

3. Copy the resulting URL from the browser address bar. For example, if you apply a filter of active=true with an

ascending sort on priority, a descending sort on opened_on, and grouped by assignment_group, the address bar

reads:

incident_list.do?sysparm_query=active=true^EQ^ORDERBYpriority^ORDERBYDESCopened_at^GROUPBYassig

Note: Do not copy the base URL (the http://instance_name.service-now.com/ portion). Always use arelative link to prevent problems when you move an update set from a development instance to a production

instance.

4. Define a module with a Link type of URL (from Arguments).

5. Paste the custom URL from step 3 into the Arguments field.

6. Click Submit.

The module now opens the custom list in the content frame.

Page 34: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 34/196

Creating a Custom Table 33

Creating a Custom Table

Overview

Administrators can create custom tables as well as applications menus, modules, and security rules that allow users

to work with data in those tables. Creating database tables is a core part of creating an application (see Creating a

Custom Application).

Creating a custom table changed in the Calgary release. If you are using an older version, see the previous version

information.

Creating Tables

1. Navigate to System Definition > Tables.

2. Click New.

3. Define the table by completing the fields on the form (see table).4. Use the Table Columns embedded list to add columns to the table.

5. Click Submit to create the table, or click Cancel to close the Table form without creating a new table.

Field Description

Label Enter a unique label for the table. The label appears on list and form views for the table. Updating the Label field also updates

the label record in the language file (for the current language). See Field Labels.

Name Populated automatically based on the label. The table name is automatically prefixed with u_ to indicate that it is a custom table.

For example, if you enter Marketing Event as the table label, the table name defaults to u_marketing_event.

[Optional] Edit the table name. You can use lowercase, alphanumeric ASCII characters and underscores (_) in the table name.

You cannot modify the automatic prefix.

Extensible Select the check box to allow other tables to extend this table. Clear the check box to prevent the creation of additional child

tables; existing child tables remain unchanged.

Extends Table [Optional] Select the table to extend. Extending a base table incorporates all of the fields of the original table and creates new

fields for the new table. Only tables that are marked as extensible appear in this list.

This option is available only when you are creating a table.

Create module [Optional] Select the check box and then complete the Add module to menu field to create a list module in the application

menu.

This option is available only when you are creating a table.

Add module to

menu

Select an existing menu or select Create new and enter a new menu name. This option is available only when the Create

module check box is selected.

Create access

controls

[Optional] Select the check box and then complete the User role field to create basic security rules for the table.

User role Enter a new name or select an existing user role. This option is available only when the Create access controls check box is

selected.

Auto-number Select the check box and then define the number format to add an auto-numbered field to the table. The check box is available

only when a number format does not exist for the table. Otherwise, you can edit the existing number format.

Page 35: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 35/196

Creating a Custom Table 34

Requests table

Adding Columns

You can add database columns when

creating a new table or when editing an

existing table. To learn more aboutcreating fields and for versions prior to

Calgary, see Creating New Fields.

To add columns from the table record:

1. Navigate to System Definition >

Tables.

2. Create a new table or open an

existing table record.

3. In the Table Columns embedded

list, double-click Insert a new row.

4. Define the column by completing the fields in the row (see table).

[Existing tables only] You can create a column with advanced settings by right-clicking the form header and

selecting Create Advanced Column. See Modifying Dictionary Entries.

5. Repeat steps 3 € 4 for each column being added.

€ To delete a field, click the red X beside the row. This option is available only for custom fields.

€ Changes to embedded lists are saved when the form is saved. See Using Embedded Lists.

€ The Table Columns embedded list provides list filtering, searching, and sorting in addition to standard

embedded list functions.

6. Click Submit or Update.

7. [Optional] To customize the form layout for the new fields, open the table record, click the Show New Record

Form related link, and personalize the form.

Fields are automatically added to the default form view. If a default form view already exists, new fields are

added at the end of the first section.

8. [Optional] To customize the list layout for the new fields, open the table record, click the Show Records in List

related link, and personalize the list layout.

Field Description

Column

label

Defines a unique label for the column. The label appears on list headers and form fields for the column.

€ Updating the Column label field also updates the label in the language file (for the current language). See Field Labels.

€ When you create a new column, the column name is populated automatically based on the label. The name is automatically

prefixed with u_ to indicate that it is custom. For example, if you enter Activity Description as the column label, the column name

defaults to u_activity_description.

Type [Mandatory] Defines the field type for the column. See Introduction to Fields. To preserve existing data, only change fields between

the same basic type (for example, Choice and String). A warning appears if a change to a custom field will result in data loss. For a

base system field, you cannot make a change that will result in data loss.

Reference Makes the field into a reference field.

Note: Dynamic reference creation is enabled for this f ield. So, if you enter a table name that does not match an existing table, a new

table is created when you save changes to the current table record. If the current table has a module in the application navigator, then a

module for the newly created table is automatically created in the same application menu.

Page 36: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 36/196

Creating a Custom Table 35

Max

length

[String fields only] Limits the length of the field. A length of under 254 appears as a single-line text field. Anything 255 characters or

over appears as a multi-line text box.

Note:

€ You can change this value only for a String field. Changes for any other type of field are ignored.

€ Users on an Oracle instance cannot increase the maximum length of a string field to anything greater than 4000 through the

application UI as this requires the CLOB datatype in Oracle. To increase beyond this size, log an incident with Technical Support

to request the change.€ To prevent data from being lost, only decrease the length of a string field when you are developing a new application and not when

a field contains data. A warning appears if a change to a custom field will result in data loss. For a base system field, you cannot

make a change that will result in data loss.

Default

value

Specifies the default value of the field for any new record. Ensure that this value uses the correct field type. For example, an integer

field can use a default value of 2 but cannot use a default value of two. These values can be overridden with dictionary overrides.

Display Indicates that this field is the display value for reference fields (appears on records that reference this table).

Note: This option does not control whether or not this field is displayed on lists or forms.

Global Default Fields

When you create a custom table, these required fields are added automatically. You cannot delete or modify these

fields.

Field Type Description

Class [sys_class_name] System Class

Name

If the table is extensible, a string field that indicates which child table the record is on.

Created [sys_created_on] Date/Time A time-stamp field automatically populated by the system at the moment of insert.

Created by

[sys_created_by]

String A string field automatically populated with the display name of the user who inserted the record.

Sys_id [sys_id] Sys ID The unique record identifier for the record, automatically populated by the system.

Updates [sys_mod_count] Integer A numeric field that counts the number of updates for this record since record creation.

Updated by

[sys_updated_by]

String A string field automatically populated with the display name of the user who most recently updated

the record.

Updated [sys_updated] Date/Time A time-stamp field automatically populated by the system every time the record is updated. Stores

the most recent update date and time.

Note:  If the new table extends a table, it inherits all the fields on the parent table.

Page 37: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 37/196

Creating a Custom Table 36

Creating Modules for Tables

Modules allow users to access the table from the application navigator. To learn more about modules and for

versions prior to Calgary, see Creating Modules.

When you are creating a table, you can quickly create a default module.

1. Select the Create module check box. The Add module to menu field appears.2. Select an existing menu or select Create new and enter a new menu name.

€ If you are working on an application, the primary menu is selected by default.

€ If you are not working on an application, Create new is selected and the menu name is the table label by

default.

3. When you save the table record, a module is automatically created with the following values:

€ Table: current table

€ Title: plural of the table label

€ Link type: List of Records

€ Application menu: selected menu

Create a default module

To create additional modules (for

example, a filtered list view):

1. Navigate to System Definition >

Tables and open the Table form.

2. Scroll down to the Table Modules

related list, and click New.

3. Define the module by completing

the Module form. See Creating a

Module.

€ The Table field defaults to thecurrent table and the Link type defaults to List of Records.

€ You must enter the Application menu and Title.

Adding Record Numbering

You can quickly create a number field and manage the number format for records on the table. To learn about

additional numbering options and for versions prior to Calgary, see Managing Record Numbering.

To add record numbering to a table that does not have a number format defined:

1. Navigate to System Definition > Tables.

2. Create a new table or open an existing table record.

3. Select the Auto-number check box. The number format fields appear on the form.

Note: The check box is available only when a number format has not yet been defined. You can define only

one number format per table.

Page 38: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 38/196

Creating a Custom Table 37

Add record numbering

4. [Optional] Modify the number

format by updating the fields (see

table).

5. Click Submit.

€ The number format is

automatically created for thetable.

€ If an auto-numbered field does

not already exist, a new field is automatically created on the table with the following values:

€ Label:  Number 

€ Name: u_number 

€ Default value: javascript:getNextObjNumberPadded();

Field Description

Prefix Enter a prefix for every number in the table (for example, INC for Incident). The default value is the first three letters of the table

label.

Number Enter the base number for this table (default value is 1000). Record numbers are automatically incremented, and the next number is

maintained in the Counter [sys_number_counter] table.

If you set the base number to a value higher than the current counter, the next record number uses the new base number. Otherwise

the next record number uses the current counter. The counter does not reset to a base number lower than itself.

Number of 

digits

Enter the minimum number of digits to use after the prefix (default value is 7).

€ Leading zeros are added to auto-numbers, if necessary (for example, INC0001001 contains three leading zeros).

€ The number of digits can exceed the minimum length (for example, if Number of digits is 2 and more than 99 records are created

on the table, the numbers continue past TAB100).

Warning: Changing this field may update all number values for existing records on a table. Take care when changing this field on a

production instance. See Renumbering Records.

Note: To change the default values for new number formats, change the Default value field on the system dictionary record for the

 Number or Number of digits field.

Removing Record Numbering

To remove record numbering from a table, delete the number format and the auto-numbered field.

1. Navigate to System Definition > Number Maintenance.

2. Click a table name to open the number record for that table.3. Click Delete.

4. Navigate to System Definition > Tables and open the Table form.

5. Click the red X beside the auto-numbered field.

6. Click Update.

Page 39: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 39/196

Creating a Custom Table 38

Creating Security Rules for Tables

You can quickly create basic security rules for a table. To learn more about security rules and for versions prior to

Calgary, see Using Access Control Rules.

To create security rules from the table record:

1. Navigate to System Definition > Tables.2. Create a new table or open an existing table record.

3. Select the Create access controls check box. The User role field appears on the form.

4. Enter a new name or select an existing user role.

If you are working on an application or a table that is part of an application, the default user role for the

application is automatically populated. Otherwise, the field is automatically populated based on the table label.

Add table security

5. Click Submit or Update.

€ If the user role does not match an

existing role, a new role is

created.

€ Security rules are created that

grant the user role full access to

the table •read, write, create,

and delete.

6. [Optional] Scroll down to the Access Controls related list to create new or modify existing access control list

(ACL) rules. See Using Access Control Rules.

Note: You can repeat the procedure to grant full access to a different role. The new role is created and the original role is replaced 

 for every ACL on the table. The original role is not changed for ACLs on other tables or objects, and any other roles or scripts on the

 ACLs are not changed.

Extending a Table

You can create a new table that stands alone or that extends a base table. Extending a base table incorporates all of 

the fields of the original table and creates new fields for the new table. This inheritance is used to create

subcategories of data. Examples include the Incident, Problem, and Change tables, which are all subcategories of the

Task table.

To extend a table, select the table to extend in the Extends Table field on the table record. This option is available

only when you are creating a table.

Note:  For a table that extends another table, the Table Columns embedded list shows columns on both the child table and the table it 

extends. To improve sorting and filtering, consider personalizing the list to add the Table field. You cannot change the table for a

 field. You can only add columns to the current table.

Page 40: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 40/196

Creating a Custom Table 39

Personalize Table Columns list to sort fields by Incident or Task 

To make a table extensible:

1. Navigate to System Definition >

Tables.

2. Click the table that you want to

extend.

3. Select the Extensible check box.

The table is now available in the

Extends Table field.

Note: You cannot extend system tables, such as sys_audit, or database view tables.

Example: Extending the Task Table

To create a table of task records, similar to the Incident, Problem, or Change table, create a new table that extends

the Task table. To allow workflows to operate on the table:

1. Navigate to System Definition > Tables and open the new table record.

2. Click the Show Dictionary Record related link.

3. Add the following to the attribute:

hasWorkflow

The new table now has fields from the Task table and supports workflows.

Example: Creating a New CMDB Class

Each CMDB class is its own table, so creating new classes requires creating new tables. Creating a custom table

changed in the Calgary release. If you are using an older version, see the previous version information.

To create a new class (such as Laptops or Thin Clients):

1. Create a new table (see following table for specific values).

2. [Optional] If you want other CMDB classes to extend the new one, select the Extensible check box. You can also

select this field after the table is created.3. Use the Table Columns embedded list to add any class-specific columns. For example, the following image

shows a way to create a new CMDB class for laptops.

Page 41: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 41/196

Creating a Custom Table 40

Example: CMDB class for laptops

4. Click Submit.

5. Add any related lists. Refer to the

existing classes (such as

Workstations) for examples.

6. Position the new module in the

correct location in the applicationnavigator.

In the Laptops example, the

new class belongs next to the

Workstations module, under the

Base Items heading.

1. Right-click Configuration in

the application navigator and select Edit Application.

2. Locate the Workstations module in the list and note the value in the Order column.

3. Open the new Laptops module and give it an order value one number greater or less than the order number

of the Workstations module.

4. Click Update.

Field Description

Label Enter the name of the new class (such as Laptops or Thin Clients).

Name Preface the name of the table with u_cmdb_ci_ to make it similar to the other CMDB classes (for example, u_cmdb_ci_laptop).

Extensible Select the check box to allow other tables to extend this table.

Extends Table Select the table representing the class under which this new class should be placed. For example, if the new class is Laptops,

which is a subclass of Computers, extend the cmdb_ci_computer table. If the new class is a top-level class, extend the cmdb_ci

table.

Add module to

menu

Select the check box and then select the Configuration application to create a list module for the new class in the same application

with the other classes.

Click the plus to expand previous version information

Each CMDB class is its own table, so creating new classes requires creating new tables. To create a new class (such as Laptops or Thin Clients),

create a new table with the following specifics:

Page 42: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 42/196

Creating a Custom Table 41

Field Description

Label Enter the name of the new class (such as Laptops or Thin Clients).

Table name Preface the name of the table with u_cmdb_ci_ to make it similar to the other CMDB classes (for example,

u_cmdb_ci_laptop).

Extends basetable

Select the table representing the class under which this new class should be placed. For example, if the new class is Laptops,which is a subclass of Computers, extend the cmdb_ci_computer table. If the new class is a top-level class, extend the cmdb_ci

table.

Create new

application

Clear this check box.

Create new

module

Select the check box and then select the Configuration application to create a list module for the new class in the same

application with the other classes.

The completed Table creator form looks like the following image.

Click Do it! to create the table. The new module appears in the Configuration application.

Personalize the form to add any new fields and then add any related lists. Refer to the existing classes for examples.

Position the new module in the correct location in the application navigator.

Versions Prior to the Calgary Release

Click the plus to expand previous version information

Legacy Creating a Table

To create a custom table:

1. Navigate to System Definition > Tables & Columns and scroll to the bottom of the page to view the table

creator.

2. Enter a Label for the table.

3. [Optional] Edit the Table name.

4. To extend an existing table, select the table in the Extends base table field.

5. [Optional] Edit the application and module settings.

For example, the settings in this screenshot would create a table called my_new_table with a label of My

Table and a new application called My New Application with a module in that new application.

Page 43: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 43/196

Creating a Custom Table 42

Create a custom table

6. Click Do it! to create the new table in the database with the

ServiceNow required fields (see Global Default Fields).

7. You can add new fields to the table by personalizing the form.

Legacy Extending a Table

You can create a new table that stands alone or that extends a base table. Extending a base table incorporates all of 

the fields of the original table and creates new fields for the new table. This inheritance is used to create

subcategories of data. Examples include the Incident, Problem, and Change tables, which are all subcategories of the

Task table.

To extend a table that is already extended, use the Extends base table field.

To extend a table that is not already extended (Berlin release):

1. Add the property glide.table.allow_new_extension with a value of true.2. Navigate to System Definition > Tables & Columns.

3. Select the table that you want to extend and click the Allow Extension button.

The table is now available in the Extends base table field.

Note:

€ You cannot extend system tables (such as sys_audit) or database view tables.

€ For versions prior to the Berlin release, contact Technical Support to extend a table that is not already extended.

Introduction to Assets and Configuration

Overview

The Configuration Management Database (CMDB) is a series of tables containing all the assets and business

services controlled by a company and their configurations. This includes computers and devices on the network,

software contracts and licenses, business services, and more. The IT desk can use the CDMB to understand better

their network users' equipment, and the relationships between them. The CMDB can also be referenced by other

processes within the system.

The CMDB can be populated using the Discovery product. Discovery searches the network for all attached

computers and devices, then populates the CMDB with information on each computer/device's configuration,

provisioning, and current status. Discovery also reports on any software which is running, and the TCP connections

between computer systems, thereby establishing their relationships.

The Asset Portfolio, Asset Contracts, and Configuration applications contain modules which display different

tables within the CMDB. Each application is designed with a specific purpose in mind.

The two Asset applications have an Asset Management focus, providing a perspective on the CMDB from a business

perspective. The Asset Portfolio application links to CMDB of all assets, hardware, software, assets in stock, as well

as records for manufacturers and vendors. The Asset Contracts application contains information about contracts,

including leases, service contracts, purchase orders, warranties, and software licenses. The Configuration

application has a focus on operation.

Page 44: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 44/196

Introduction to Assets and Configuration 43

CMDB

CMDB contains two major record types:

€ Configuration Item (CI): Any computer, device, or piece of software in the CMDB. A CI's record will include

all of the relevant data, such as manufacturer, vendor, location, etc. Configuration items can be created or

maintained either using tables, lists, and forms within the platform, or using Discovery.

€ Relation Type: A defined relationship between a CI and either another CI, a user, or a group. Relation types are

defined twice, once from the perspective of the child CI and once from the parent CI's perspective. For instance, a

parent CI that powers a child CI uses relation type Powers::Is Powered By. Example relation types include In

 Rack::Rack contains, Log Reviewed by::Reviews logs for, or Backup done by::Does backups for. CMDB

relationships can be established using Discovery, or using the tables, lists, and forms within the platform. The

CMDB form has a specific Related Items toolbar optimized for modifying relationships.

CI Relations Formatter Overview

The default CI form includes the CI relations formatter. This element contains the list of related CIs and a toolbar

with controls for viewing the relationships between the current CI and related CIs. Note that the BSM Map provides

a more complete view of CI relationships. Configure the controls in this formatter with two properties that restrict

varying aspects of the view. These two properties are available with the Aspen release. For additional information

about formatters, see Creating a Formatter.

Page 45: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 45/196

Introduction to Assets and Configuration 44

CI Relationship Builder

Click the CI relationship builder icon ( ) to display the Define Relationships page. Used to define CI relationships

manually, this page is a sophisticated version of the standard ServiceNow slushbucket. For more information, see

Defining CI Relationships.

Flat Layout

Click the flat layout icon ( ) to group the related CIs by relationship.

Page 46: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 46/196

Introduction to Assets and Configuration 45

Tree Layout

Click the tree layout icon ( ) to group the related CIs in a hierarchical tree.

BSM Map

Click the BSM icon ( ) to launch the BSM map in another window or tab. The map starts with a focused item and

displays a set number of levels below and above that item in the heirarchy. Using a right click, the user can focus on

any item within the map and redraw the map using that item as the focus. A right click can also highlight the

hierarchy of any particular item in the map.

Related Lists of CI ComponentsRelated Lists in CI records display additional components contained by that CI, such as disk drives on a server and

the rules that control the behavior of a network router. When Discovery runs, the Related List is populated with the

components that Discovery finds running on the CI. The CI record might show different lists from scan to scan,

depending on whether or not Discovery found the component. By default, the Related Lists only display those

components that are associated with that CI in the CMDB that have been discovered by the last scan. CI components

that are discovered but cannot be matched to the CI in the CMDB are added to the CMDB and appear in the Related

List. Components that are recorded in the CMDB but are not discovered in a scan, are deemed absent and do not

appear in the list. There are two types of components that appear in the Related List: those that are CIs themselves

(such as hard disks), and those that are not (serial numbers and rules). The default filter condition in the breadcrumbs

for components that are CIs is Status != Absent. The filter condition for components that are not CIs is

Absent=false.

In the following example, the snc-tc01 router has several Related Lists affected by these filter conditions, including

routing rules, disk drives, interfaces, and network adapters. Only those components found during the last Discovery

appear in these Related Lists.

Page 47: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 47/196

Page 48: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 48/196

Adding Existing Gauges to a Homepage 47

Creating a New Gauge from a Report

You can create any report as a gauge, making it possible to add that report to a homepage. (You need the

gauge_maker role in order to do this.)

Note that list reports do not preserve user list view preferences such as the option to automatically expand grouped

records.

1. Open or create a report that you want to access from a gauge.

2. Click the button.

3. To add the new gauge to your homepage, without having to add it later, click the button.

Creating a New Gauge from a List of Records

In order to create lists of records (for example 'My Work', 'My Groups Work' and 'Unassigned Incidents') as a gauge,

you will need to have administrator rights.

1. Navigate to System UI > Gauges

2. Click the button.

3. Name your gauge something unique.

4. Set 'Type' as 'List'.

5. Set the 'Table' field.

6. Set 'Aggregate' as 'Count'.

7. Define any Queries that you want to set.

Other fields on the form are not used when creating a list gauge.

8. Click the button.9. Save your work.

URL Gauge variable height workaroundURL gauges can be used to display a different web page or website within a gauge that can be added to a homepage.

Currently URL gauges are set with a fixed height, meaning that you may have to scroll to see the entire web page in

the gauge. URL gauge widths are controlled by the positioning of the gauge on a particular homepage. URL gauge

height is not something that can be modified currently. One workaround is to set up an iFrame in a UI page as

follows...

1) Create a UI page. The UI page name has to start with 'render_gadget_' (eg. 'render_gadget_iFrameSNC'). Add the

following to the 'HTML' field, replacing the 'src' with whatever URL you want to have in the iFrame. The height you

specify has to be a static value and you have to use CSS style tags for this to work.

<iframe id="myframe" src="http://www.service-now.com" scrolling="yes" style="height:450px; width:100%"></iframe>

2) Modify a widget or create a new widget (System UI -> Widgets) so that you can select your UI page from the

'Add content' selector on a homepage. The important thing is that your widget script references your UI page. The

name of the widget will be the name of the category in the 'Add content' selector. The 'Renderer type' field on the

widget record should be 'JavaScript'. This script can be used if you want to create a new widget.

function sections() {

  return {'ServiceNow' : { 'type' : 'iFrameSNC' }};

}

 

function render() {

  var type = renderer.getPreferences().get("type");

Page 49: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 49/196

Adding Existing Gauges to a Homepage 48

  var gf = new GlideForm(renderer.getGC(), "render_gadget_" + type, 0);

  gf.setDirect(true);

  gf.setRenderProperties(renderer.getRenderProperties());

  return gf.getRenderedPage();

}

 

function getEditLink() {

  return "sys_ui_page.do?sysparm_query=name=render_gadget_"  + 

renderer.getPreferences().get("type");

}

3) Now go to any homepage and add the new content.

Page 50: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 50/196

49

Domain 2

Creating Users and Associating to a Group

Overview

When you add users to ServiceNow, make sure that each user is associated with a group. Consider which fields are

mandatory. Full, complete user profiles are the most useful. Use a unique user ID when creating new profiles or

updating existing profiles. If all logs are updated by the admin user, it becomes difficult to track what was

configured and by whom. Consider creating an ITIL-based role for each administrator for these types of tasks. To

import large numbers of users at once, consider using import sets.

Enhancements

Berlin

The following enhancements have been added as of the Berlin release:

€ The User ID field [sys_user.user_name] requires unique values. You cannot create a new user whose User ID

duplicates an existing user.

Creating a User

1. Navigate to User Administration > Users.

2. Click New.

3. Enter the user's information (see table).

4. Click Submit.

The new user record appears at the top of the list.

 Field Input Value

User ID Create a unique identifier for this user's ServiceNow login user name. Typical examples of user IDs are cwitherspoon and

charlie.witherspoon. You cannot create a new user whose User ID duplicates an existing user (Berlin release). If you do import

duplicates from an update set, the more recently created names takes the duplicate User ID.

First name Enter the user's full first name.

Last name Enter the user's last name.

Title Enter a title or job description, or select one from the list.

Department Select the user's department from the list.

Password Assign a password to the user. This password can be permanent or temporary.

Password

needs reset

Select this check box to require the user to change the password during the first login.

Locked out Select this check box to lock the user out of the instance and terminate all their active sessions.

Page 51: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 51/196

Creating Users and Associating to a Group 50

Active Select this check box to make this user active. Only the administrator sees inactive user in:

€ Lists of users

€ The selection list on reference fields (magnifying glass icon)

€ The auto-complete list that appears when you type into a reference field

Email Enter the user's email address.

To enter a non-standard email address that does not pass field validation, you must deactivate the validation script first.

1. Navigate to System Definition > Validation Scripts.

2. Select the email record.

3. Clear the Active check box and save the change.

4. Complete the user profile, including the email address, and update or submit the record.

5. Reactivate the email validation script.

Notification Select the type of notification to send to this user. The default is Email. If you select None, the user can still receive notifications if 

he or she subscribes to the notification or is specified as a recipient in the Email Notifications form.

To prevent notification completely, set a condition on the Email Notification form itself that does not deliver the notification if this

field is set to None.

Calendar

integration

Select Outlook to have this user receive meeting notifications via email directly to the calendar. Otherwise, select None.

Time zone Select the user's time zone.

Business

phone

Enter this user's business phone number.

Mobile phone Enter this user's mobile phone number.

Photo Attach a photo of the user, if appropriate.

Associating the User to a Group

1. Navigate to User Administration > Groups.

2. Click the group to which you want to assign the user.

3. In the Group Members related list, click Edit.

4. Select the user in the Collection list, and then click Add.

5. Click Save.

Assigning Roles to the User

A user automatically inherits roles from all groups the user belongs to. These roles cannot be deleted from the user's

record, only from the group's record. Roles can also be associated directly with the user.

To add roles to a user's record:1. Navigate to User Administration > Users.

2. Open a user's record.

3. In the Roles related list, click Edit.

4. Select the desired roles in the Collection list, and then click Add.

5. Click Save.

Page 52: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 52/196

Creating Users and Associating to a Group 51

Allow Users to View Their Profile

Users are able to view their profile by clicking their name in the Welcome banner. If your users cannot do this,

enable a system property:

1. Navigate to the System Properties [sys_properties] table.

2. Search for the glide.ui.welcome.profile_link property.

3. Set the value to true.

Creating Groups

Overview

A group is a set of users who share a common purpose. Groups may perform tasks such as approving change

requests, resolving incidents, receiving email notifications, or performing work order tasks. Any business rules,

assignment rules, system roles, or attributes that refer to the group apply to all group members automatically. Userswith the user_admin role can create and edit groups.

Creating Groups

1. Navigate to User Administration > Groups.

2. Click New.

3. Fill in the form.

To see some of the fields, you may need to personalize the form.

 Field Description

Name Name of the group.

Manager Group manager or lead.

Type Category for this group. For example, a group designated as type catalog is a service catalog group and can also be accessed under the

Service Catalog > Catalog Policy > Fulfillment Groups module.

You may need to personalize the form to add the Type field. Activating the Work Management plugin (Calgary release) adds the

Type field automatically.

See also Configuring Group Types for Assignment Groups.

Group

Email

Group email distribution list or the email address of the group's point of contact, such as the group manager.

Parent Other group of which this group is a member. If a group has a parent, the child group inherits the roles of the parent group. The

members of the child group are considered members of the parent group.

Note: The Assignment group and Assigned to fields on incidents have special logic that prevents setting the Assigned to field to a

user not defined directly in the assignment group. Therefore, only users defined in the assignment group, and not members of the

assignment group's child groups, can be entered in the Assigned to field.

Active Check box that indicates whether the group is active or inactive. Inactive groups still appear in any reference field that already

references the group, but are not visible by non-admin users in:

€ lists of groups

€ the reference lookup list for reference fields

€ the autocomplete list of groups displayed when you type into a reference field

Exclude

manager

Check box that controls whether the group's manager receives email notifications. Note that if the Subscription Based Notifications

plugin is enabled, managers receive all notifications they are subscribed to, regardless of the Exclude manager setting.

Page 53: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 53/196

Creating Groups 52

Include

members

Check box that controls whether the group members receive individual emails when someone sends an email to the Group Email

address.

Adding Users to Groups

After defining a group, add users to the group.

1. Navigate to User Administration > Groups.

2. Click a group Name.

3. In the Group Members related list, click Edit

4. Select one or more names in the Collection list.

5. Click Add.

6. Click Submit.

Removing Users from Groups

You can remove users from a group at any time.

1. Navigate to User Administration > Groups.

2. Click a group Name.

3. In the Group Members related list, select the check box next to a group member name.

4. From the Actions on selected rows menu, select Delete.

Creating Roles

OverviewA role is a category that can be assigned to a group or user, and can be granted access to particular parts of the

system. Once access has been granted to a role, all of the groups or users assigned to that role are granted the same

access. Roles can also contain other roles, and any access granted to one role will be granted to any role that contains

it.

For a complete list of the roles included with ServiceNow, see Base System Roles.

Creating Roles

1. Navigate to User Administration > Role.2. Click New.

3. Give the role a unique, descriptive name and a brief description.

4. Click Submit.

The new role appears on the Roles list. It does not have access to any applications or modules until you add

other roles to it or add the new role to the appropriate applications and modules.

5. To add other existing roles to the new role, open the role in form view and click Edit in the Contains Roles

Related List.

Use the slushbucket to add the appropriate existing roles to the new role and click Save. Users who are

assigned the new role automatically inherit access to the same applications and modules as the existing roles

added here.

6. To create a role to add to the new role, click New in the Contains Roles Related List.

Page 54: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 54/196

Creating Roles 53

7. To give the role access to additional applications or modules:

1. Navigate to System Definition > Applications or System Definition > Modules.

2. Click the appropriate application or module to open it in form view.

3. Click the lock to open the Roles field.

4. Use the slushbucket to add the desired roles to the application or module.

5. Click the lock to close the Roles field, then save your changes.

Role Delegation

Overview

With the Role Delegation plugin, an administrator can grant a user the right to delegate roles within a particular

group with the role_delegator role. Roles available to a role delegator can come from roles specifically granted to

that user or roles that the user inherits by being the member of a group. For example, if a user is a role delegator in

the Network and Database groups, he may delegate roles he inherits from the Network group to members of the

Database group.

Defining a Role Delegator

When approved, the role_delegator role is granted to a specified user in the named group. That user may then

delegate any role they have to any member of the group.

To designate a role delegator:

1. Navigate to User Administration > Designate Role Delegator.

2. Select the group in which a member shall be a role delegator.

3. Select the member of the group who will be the role delegator.

4. Click Submit.

A change request is created for the role delegator request. The change request is approved automatically.

Page 55: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 55/196

Role Delegation 54

Viewing Delegated Roles

An administrator can view role designation in the following locations on the platform:

€ User records

€ Role Delegators module

€ Role Audit module

User Records

Open a user's record (User Administration > Users) to view all the roles assigned to that user.

Role Delegators

To view existing role delegators (and the groups in which they can delegate roles), navigate to User Administration

> Role Delegators. All the role delegators in the instance are listed, showing the groups in which they have the

role_delegator role.

Role Audit

The Audit Role list view displays all the role changes made in the instance by user and group. To access the Audit

Role list, navigate to System Security > Reports > Audit Roles.

Page 56: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 56/196

Role Delegation 55

Delegating Roles

To delegate specific roles to members of a group, navigate to User Administration > Delegate Roles in Group.

This module is available to users with the role_delegator role. The role delegator provides the following fields:

Field Input Value

Group Select the group in which a member shall be delegated a role or roles

User Select the member who shall be delegated roles in that group.

Roles to delegate Select the roles to delegate to the group member

Upon submission, a change request is created for the delegation request. This change request is approved

automatically, and the specified roles are granted to the named user in the group selected.

Page 57: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 57/196

Role Delegation 56

Removing Roles

Delegated roles can be removed in the same form by reversing the process. Select the group and user, remove the

unwanted roles from the Roles slushbucket, and then re-submit the request.

Administration

Record Producers

The Role Delegation modules link to Record Producers. These Record Producers create Change Requests that are,

by default, automatically approved by the following graphical workflows:

€ Grant role_delegator role to user in group

€  Delegate roles to group member graphical workflows.

Note: These workflows can be customized as desired to add approval steps.

can_delegate Field

The Roles [sys_user_role] table has a can_delegate field. A role can be delegated if this field's value is true. In the

base system, the following fields are not delegatable:

€ admin

€ role_delegator (a user with the role_delegator role cannot, by default, delegate this role to other group members)

€ public

€ nobody

Group Manager Change Business Rule

The Group Manager Change business rule, disabled by default, will automatically grant the role_delegator role to a

user when they become manager of a group (using the Manager field on the Group form). The role is removed when

the user is no longer the manager of the group.

To take advantage of this business rule, simply activate it.

Page 58: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 58/196

Using Access Control Rules 57

Using Access Control Rules

Overview

ServiceNow uses access control list (ACL) rules, also called access control rules, to control what data users can

access and how they can access it. ACL rules require users to pass a set of requirements in order to gain access to

particular data. Each ACL rule specifies:

€ The object being secured

€ The permissions required to access the object

ServiceNow searches for ACL rules that match the object the user wants to access. If there are no matching ACL

rules for the object, then the object does not require any additional security checks. By default, ServiceNow provides

ACL rules to restrict access to all database and personalization operations.

After finding a matching ACL rule, ServiceNow evaluates if the user has the permissions required to access the

object. If a user meets the ACL rule permissions, the instance grants the user access to the object. If a user does not

meet the ACL rule permissions, the instance denies the user access to the object.

ACL Rule Workflow

Users with access to the security_admin role can:

€ Create ACL rules to secure new objects

€ Update existing ACL rules to grant or deny users access to objects

based on their business requirements

€ Debug ACL rules to determine why users cannot access certain

objects

Enhancements

Calgary

The following enhancements are available as of the Calgary release:

€ You can create ACL rules for processors.

€ You can create ACL rules for client-callable script includes.

Creating ACL Rules

Create custom ACL rules in order to secure access to new objects or to change the default security behavior. To

create new ACL rules, you must elevate privileges to the security_admin role.

1. Elevate privileges to the security_admin role.

2. Navigate to System Security > Access Control (ACL).

3. Click New.

4. Define the object the ACL rule secures and the permissions required to access the object. See Access Control

Fields.

5. Click Submit.

Page 59: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 59/196

Using Access Control Rules 58

Note: The Requires roles related list is available only after you save the ACL rule.

Access Control Fields

Access control records use the following fields.

 Field Description

Type Select what kind of object this ACL rule secures. An object's type determines how the object is named and what operations are

available.

Operation Select the operation this ACL rule secures. Each object type has its own list of operations. An ACL rule can only secure one

operation. To secure multiple operations, create a separate ACL rule for each.

Name Enter the object's record name or select the object's table and field names. The name identifies the object being secured. The more

specific the name is, the more specific the ACL rule is. You can use the wildcard character asterisk (*) in place of a record name,

table name, or field name to select all objects that match a particular record type, all tables, or all fields. You cannot combine a

wildcard character and a text search. For example, inc* is not a valid ACL rule name, but incident.* and *.number are valid ACL rulenames.

Active Select this check box to have ServiceNow enforce this ACL rule.

Admin

Overrides

Select this check box to have users with the admin role automatically pass the permissions check for this ACL rule, regardless of 

what script or role restrictions would apply. Clear this check box if administrators must meet the permissions defined in this ACL

rule to gain access to the secured object. Since administrators will always pass role checks (see the description of the Requires role

field), use the condition builder or Script field to create a permissions check that administrators must pass.

Description [Optional] Enter a description of the object or permissions this ACL rule secures.

Condition Use this condition builder to select the fields and values that must be true for users to access the object.

Script Enter a custom script describing the permissions required to access the object. The script can use the values of the current and

previous global variables as well as system properties. The script must generate a true or false response in one of two ways:

€ return an answer variable set to a value of true or false

€ evaluate to true or false

In either case, users only gain access to the object when the script evaluates to true and the user meets any conditions the ACL rule

has. Both the conditions and the script must evaluate to true for a user to access the object.

Requires

role

Use this related list to specify the roles a user must have in order to access the object. If you list multiple roles, a user with any one of 

the listed roles can access the object. Note: Users with the admin role will always pass this permissions check because ServiceNow

automatically grants admin users all roles.

Granting or Denying AccessWhen a user attempts to access a particular object, ServiceNow first searches for ACL rules that match the requested

object's type and operation. From this list, ServiceNow then searches for an ACL rule that matches the object's name.

If an ACL rule matches the object's name, then the user must meet the permissions described in this rule to access

the secured object.

If the user fails to meet the permissions required by the first rule, ServiceNow searches for the next ACL rule that

matches the object's name. For each matching ACL rule, the user must meet the required permissions in order to

access the object. ServiceNow stops searching for matching ACL rules after the user meets the minimum required

permissions for the current object type. If the user does not meet the permission requirements in any matching ACL

rule, the instance denies the user access to the object.

The effects of the being denied access to an object depend on the ACL rule that the user failed. For example, failing

a read operation ACL rule prevents the user from seeing the object. Depending on the object secured, the ACL rule

Page 60: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 60/196

Using Access Control Rules 59

could hide a field on a form, hide rows from a list, or prevent a user from accessing a particular UI page. See the

table for a complete list of results of failing an ACL rule for a given operation and object type.

 Operation Results of Failing an ACL Rule on Object

execute User cannot execute scripts on record or UI page.

create User cannot see the New UI action from forms. The user also cannot insert records into a table using API protocols such as

web services. Note that a create ACL with a condition that a field contain a specific value always evaluates as false, as fields

on new records are considered empty until saved.

read User cannot see the object in forms or lists. The user also cannot retrieve records using API protocols such as web services.

write User sees a read-only field in forms and lists, and the user cannot update records using API protocols such as web services.

delete User cannot see the Delete UI action from forms. The user also cannot remove records from a table using API protocols such

as web services.

edit_task_relations User cannot extend the task table.

edit_ci_relations User cannot extend the Configuration Item [cmdb_ci] table.

save_as_template User cannot see the UI action to save a record as a template.

add_to_list User cannot view or personalize specific columns in the list mechanic.

list_edit User cannot update records (rows) from a list.

report_on User cannot create reports on the object.

personalize_choices User cannot right-click a choice list field and select Personalize Choices.

Matching ACL Rules to Objects

Each object type has its own matching requirements.

 Object Type Matching ACL RulesRequired to Access Object

Existing Wildcard ACL Rules

Client-callable

script includes

Users must meet the permissions

of two ACL rules:

1. All wildcard ACL rules for

the object (if any ACL rule

exists for the operation).

2. The first ACL rule that

matches the object's name (if 

any ACL rule exists for the

operation).

By default, there are no wildcard (*) rules for these object types. If you create a wildcard

ACL rule for one of these objects, then the ACL rule applies to all objects of this type.

Processors

UI pages

Record Users must meet the permissionsof two ACL rules:

1. The first ACL rule that

matches the record's field (if 

any ACL rule exists for the

operation).

2. The first ACL rule that

matches the record's table (if 

any ACL rule exists for the

operation).

By default, ServiceNow provides wildcard table rules (*) for the create, read, write, anddelete operations and provides wildcard field rules (*.*) for the personalize_choices, create,

and save_as_template operations. When you create a new table, create new ACL rules for

the table unless you want to use the provided wildcard ACL rules.

Note: ServiceNow uses the high security property Security manager default behavior (glide.sm.default_mode ) to determine

whether users can access objects that only match against wildcard table ACL rules. When this property is set to Deny access , only

administrators can access objects that match the wildcard table ACL rules.

Page 61: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 61/196

Using Access Control Rules 60

Note: The wildcard field ACL rule (*.*) for the create operation reuses the same permissions as the write operation. This means that 

the create permissions are the same as the write permissions unless you define an explicit create operation ACL rule.

Evaluating ACL Rule Permission Requirements

An ACL rule only grants a user access to an object if the user meets  all of the permissions required by the matching

ACL rules.

€ The condition must evaluate to true.

€ The script must evaluate to true or return an answer variable with the value of true.

€ The user must have one of the roles in the required roles list.

€ The other matching ACL rules for the object type must evaluate to true.

ACL Rule Workflow to Evaluate Permissions

Record ACL Rules

Record ACL rules consist of two parts:

€ Table name: the table being secured. If other tables extend from

this table, then the table is considered a parent table. ACL rules for

parent tables apply to any table that extends the parent table.

€ Field name: the field being secured. Some fields are part of 

multiple tables because of table extension. ACL rules for fields in a

parent table apply to any table that extends the parent table.

ACL rules can secure the following record operations:

 Operation Description

execute Allows users to run an application or script.

create Allows users to insert new records (rows) into a table.

read Allows users to display records from a table.

write Allows users to update records in a table.

delete Allows users to remove records from a table or drop a table.

edit_task_relations Allows users to extend the Task table.

edit_ci_relations Allows users to extend the Configuration Item [cmdb_ci] table.

save_as_template Allows users to save a record as a template.

add_to_list Allows users to insert records (rows) into a table from a list.

Page 62: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 62/196

Using Access Control Rules 61

list_edit Allows users to update records (rows) from a list.

report_on Allows users to create reports on the table.

personalize_choices Allows users to personalize the table or field.

Processing Order for Record ACL RulesServiceNow processes ACL rules in the following order:

1. Match the object against field ACL rules.

2. Match the object against table ACL rules.

This processing order ensures that users gain access to more specific objects before gaining access to less specific

ones.

A user must pass both field and table ACL rules in order to access a record object.

€ If a user fails a field ACL rule but passes a table ACL rule, ServiceNow denies the user access to the field

described by the field ACL rule.

€ If a user fails a table ACL rule, ServiceNow denies the user access to all fields in the table even if the user

previously passed a field ACL rule.

Matching Workflow for Record ACL Rules

Field ACL Rules

ServiceNow processes field ACL rules in the following order:

1. Match the table and field name. For example, incident.number.

2. Match the parent table and field name. For example, task.number.

3. Match any table (wildcard) and field name. For example,

*.number.

4. Match the table and any field (wildcard). For example, incident.*.5. Match the parent table and any field (wildcard). For example,

task.*.

6. Match any table (wildcard) and any field (wildcard). For example,

*.*.

The first successful evaluation stops ACL rule processing at the field

level. This means that when a user passes a field ACL rule's

permissions, ServiceNow grants the user access to the record object

secured by the field ACL rule and stops searching for matching field ACL rules. For example, if a user passes the

field ACL rule for incident.number, ServiceNow stops searching for rules that secure the Number field and grants

the user access to the field. If a user passes the field ACL rule for task.number, ServiceNow stops searching for

matching ACL rules and grants the user access to the number field in the parent table and also to extended tables that

use the field.

Page 63: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 63/196

Using Access Control Rules 62

Table ACL Rules

In most cases there is not an individual field ACL rule for every field in the table the users is trying to access. If no

field ACL rule matches the record object, the user must pass the table ACL rule. Since ServiceNow provides

wildcard table ACL rules that match every table, the user must always pass at least one table ACL rule. ServiceNow

provides additional table ACL rules to control access to specific tables.

ServiceNow processes table ACL rules in the following order:

1. Match the table name. For example, incident.

2. Match the parent table name. For example, task.

3. Match any table name (wildcard). For example, *.

Just like with field ACL rules, ServiceNow grants the user access to the record object secured by the ACL rule and

stops searching for matching ACL rules the first time a user passes a table ACL rule's permissions. A user who

passes the table ACL rule for incident has access to all fields in the Incident table. A user who passes the table ACL

rule for task has access to all fields in the Task table as well as the fields in extended tables. A user who passes the

table ACL rule for any table has access to all fields in all tables.

Multiple ACL Rules at the Same Point in the Processing Order

If ServiceNow matches two or more rules at the same point in the processing order, the user must pass any one of the

ACL rules permissions in order to access the object. For example, if you create two field ACL rules for

incident.number, then a user who passes one rule has access to the number field regardless of whether the user failed

any other field ACL rule at the same point in the processing order.

UI Page ACL Rules

UI page ACL rules specify the UI page to be secured. Use the asterisk character as a wildcard to search for any UI

page. For a list of available UI pages, navigate to System UI > UI Pages.

ACL rules can secure the following UI page operations:

 Operation Description

execute Allows users to run an application or script.

create Allows users to insert new UI page records.

read Allows users to display the UI page.

write Allows users to update UI page records.

delete Allows users to remove UI page records.

edit_task_relations Allows users to extend the Task table.

edit_ci_relations Allows users to extend the Configuration Item [cmdb_ci] table.

save_as_template Allows users to save a UI page record as a template.

add_to_list Allows users to insert UI page records from a list.

list_edit Allows users to update UI page records from a list.

report_on Allows users to create reports on UI page records.

personalize_choices Allows users to personalize UI page records.

Since UI pages typically only display read-only information, the most common UI page ACL rule is for the "read"

operation. For an example of limiting access to live feed with this type of rule, see Limiting Live Feed Access by

Role.

Page 64: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 64/196

Using Access Control Rules 63

Processor ACL Rules

ACL rules can secure access to the execute operation of all or specific processors (Calgary release). Processor ACL

rules specify the processor you want to secure. Use the asterisk character as a wildcard to search for any processor.

For a list of available processors, navigate to System Definition > Processors.

By default, ServiceNow includes an ACL rule for the EmailClientProcessor to restrict the email client to users with

the itil role. See Enabling the Email Client for more information.

Client-Callable Script Include ACL Rules

ACL rules can secure access to the execute operation of all or specific client-callable scripts (Calgary release). Script

include ACL rules specify the client-callable script include to be secured. Use the asterisk character as a wildcard to

search for any client-callable script include. For a list of available script includes, navigate to System Definition >

Script Includes. You can personalize the list to show the Client callable column.

By default, ServiceNow does not include any ACL rules for client-callable script includes.

Debugging

ServiceNow offers the following ACL rule debugging tools:

€ Field level debugging

€ ACL rule output messages

To enable ACL rule debugging, navigate to System Security > Debug Security Rules.

Note:  Impersonation can simplify debugging ACL rules. First enable ACL debugging, then impersonate another user to see what 

 ACL rules the user passes and fails.

Field Level Debugging

With debugging enabled, ServiceNow displays a small bug icon next to each field with an ACL rule. Clicking the

icon lists the ACL rules that apply for the field and the evaluation results.

Page 65: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 65/196

Using Access Control Rules 64

ACL Rule Output Messages

ServiceNow displays ACL rule output messages at the bottom of each list and form. The output message lists the

ACL rule name, the permissions required, and the evaluation result (pass or fail).

Troubleshooting

Here is a list of common ACL rule errors and their solutions. Enable debugging to help troubleshoot an issue.

 Error or Symptom Solution

You cannot access records from a

custom table.

Create a table ACL rule for the custom table granting users access to the table. Without an explicit table

ACL rule, users must pass the permissions in the table wildcard (*) ACL rule, which by default restricts

access to administrators only. Enable debugging and determine what ACL rules are evaluated for the

custom table.

You create a custom ACL rule that

does not work properly.

The most likely problems are that another rule takes precedence over your custom rule in the processing

order or that the user does not meet all the permission requirements for the object type. Enable debugging

and verify that the ACL rule is being evaluated.

Your field ACL rule does not work 

properly.

There is likely a table ACL rule that the user has not met. Enable debugging and determine what ACL rules

are evaluated for the field. Verify that there is not a conflicting table ACL rule or duplicate field ACL rule.

Your table ACL rule does not work 

properly.

There is either an ACL rule higher in the processing order or a duplicate table ACL rule interfering with

the table ACL rule. Enable debugging and determine what ACL rules are evaluated for the table.

You can see a field in a list but not in

form.

It is possible that the ACL rule conditions or script are being triggered in the list but not in the form.

Enable debugging and determine when the ACL rules evaluate to true. Update the conditions or script to

have the same behavior on the list and form.

You receive an error message when

trying to execute a processor or

client-callable script include

There is an ACL rule for the processor or client-callable script include that the user has not met. If the user

should have access to the object, enable debugging and determine what ACL rules are evaluated for the

processor or script include. Update the ACL rule or the user roles as needed to access the object.

Page 66: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 66/196

Using Access Control Rules 65

Controlling Whether Script Conditions Apply to Reference Fields

By default, ACL rules ignore the script conditions of a table's reference fields. The default behavior is intended to

improve instance performance. If you want to enable script conditions for reference fields, add the following system

property.

 Property Description

glide.sys_reference_row_check Controls whether the script conditions of Access Control Rules apply to a table's reference fields.

€ Type: true | false

€ Default value: false

€ Location: Add to the System Properties [sys_properties] table

High Security Settings

Warning: This functionality is intended for new instances. Configuring this application on an existing instance may cause changes to

behavior. Please consult with ServiceNow Technical Support before enabling.

Overview

The Platform Security Settings - High plugin is active by default on all new ServiceNow instances. For instances in

which the high security settings are active, observe the following cautions:

€ Integrations into ServiceNow tables fail unless access control lists (ACL) are defined for the tables being accessed

and the appropriate roles are assigned.

€ The same ACL requirements apply for import sets that apply to integrations.

Note:  For instances running earlier versions, this plugin can be activated by an administrator. After activating the plugin, log out

and log back in for it to take effect.

Platform Security Settings - High automatically activates the Contextual Security plugin if it is not already active. In

addition, Platform Security Settings - High delivers the following settings and features in the context of increasing

the security of your ServiceNow platform.

Features:

€ High Security Settings: Default property values to harden security on your platform by centralizing all criticalsecurity settings to one location for management and auditing.

€ Default Deny Property: A new security manager property controls the default security behavior for table access.

€ Security Administrator Role: A new role used to prevent modification of key security settings and resources. The

Security Administrator role is not inherited by the admin role and must be explicitly assigned.

€ Access Control Lists: Prevents modification of sensitive and platform-level resources in prior versions.

€ Property Access Control: Enables the ability to set read and write roles to individual properties in order to prevent

modification.

€ Elevated Privilege: Allows users to operate in the context of a normal user and elevate to higher security role

when needed.

€ Transaction and system logs are read only.

Page 67: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 67/196

Page 68: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 68/196

High Security Settings 67

glide.ui.forgetme Remove Remember me check box from login page. Default: Yes

glide.smtp.auth Authenticate with the SMTP server by the user name and password properties. Default: Yes

glide.script.use.sandbox Run client generated scripts (AJAXEvaluate and query conditions) inside of a reduced rights

"sandbox". If enabled, only those business rules and script includes with the Client callable checkbox

set to true are available and certain back-end API calls are disallowed. Default: Yes

glide.soap.strict_security Enforce strict security on incoming SOAP requests. Checking this requires incoming SOAP requests togo through the security manager for table and field access and checks SOAP users for the correct roles

for using the web service.

[2]

[3]

Default: Yes

glide.basicauth.required.wsdl Require basic authorization for incoming WSDL requests. Default: Yes

glide.basicauth.required.csv Require basic authorization for incoming CSV requests. Default: Yes

glide.basicauth.required.excel Require basic authorization for incoming Excel requests. Default: Yes

glide.basicauth.required.importprocessor Require basic authorization for incoming import requests. Default: Yes

glide.basicauth.required.pdf Require basic authorization for incoming PDF requests. Default: Yes

glide.basicauth.required.rss Require basic authorization for incoming RSS requests. Default: Yes

glide.basicauth.required.scriptedprocessor Require basic authorization for incoming script requests. Default: Yes

glide.basicauth.required.soap Require basic authorization for incoming SOAP requests. Default: Yes

glide.basicauth.required.unl Require basic authorization for incoming unload requests. Default: Yes

glide.basicauth.required.xml Require basic authorization for incoming XML requests. Default: Yes

glide.basicauth.required.xsd Require basic authorization for incoming XSD requests. Default: Yes

glide.cms.catalog_uri_relative Enforce relative links from the URI parameter on /ess/catalog.do. If checked, then only relative URLs

are permitted through the /ess/catalog.do page using the parameter 'uri'. If unchecked, all URLs are

permitted, which may permit linking to external unauthorized content. Default: Yes

glide.set_x_frame_options Enable this property to set the X-Frame-Options response header to SAMEORIGIN for all UI pages.

The X-Frame-Options HTTP response header can be used to indicate whether or not a browser should

be allowed to render a page in a <frame> or <iframe>. Sites can use this to avoid clickjacking attacks,

by ensuring that their content is not embedded into other sites. [4] Default: Yes

glide.ui.attachment.download_mime_types A list of comma separated attachment mime types that do not render inline in the browser. This will

prevent cross site scripting attacks. For example, text/html forces HTML files to be downloaded to the

client as attachments rather than viewed inline in the browser.

This property is available starting with the Aspen release.

Default: Yes

glide.ui.security.allow_codetag Allow support for embedding HTML code by using the [code] tag. Default: No

glide.ui.security.codetag.allow_script Allow embedded HTML (using [code] tags) to contain JavaScript tags. Default: No

glide.script.allow.ajaxevaluate Enable the AJAXEvaluate processor. Default: No

glide.login.autocomplete Allow browsers to use autocomplete on password fields on login forms. Default: No

The following properties have been defined in the sys_properties table, but are not visible on the High Security

Settings page.

Page 69: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 69/196

High Security Settings 68

 Name Description

glide.security.csrf_previous.allow Allow usage of an expired secure token to identify and validate incoming requests. This token is used to

prevent cross site request forgery attacks. Default: No

glide.security.csrf_previous.time_limit Time in seconds for a secure token to expire. It allows control over the length of time that the previous

CSRF token is valid. When the user session expires, the secure token expires with it unless the "allowing

reuse of expired tokens are allowed" property is enabled and it's within the time frame described by thisproperty. This token is used to prevent cross-site request forgery attacks. Default: 86400 seconds or 1 day

Default Deny Property

Activating the  High Security plugin creates the glide.sm.default_mode security property, which controls the

security manager default behavior when the only matching ACL rules are the wildcard table ACL rules. The High

Security application also includes a set of wildcard table ACL rules for the most common record-based operations:

read, write, create, and delete as well as a significant number of ACLs to provide role-based access to system tables.

For example, there are ACLs that grant sys_script access to the business_rule_admin role because that role is

documented as being able to manage business rules.

The choices for the glide.sm.default_mode property are:

€ Deny Access: The wildcard table ACL rules restrict the read, write, create, and delete operations on all tables

unless the user has the admin role or meets the requirements of another table ACL rule. Other operations, such as

report_on and personalize_choices, are unaffected by this setting.

€ Allow Access: The wildcard table ACL rules allow the read, write, create, and delete operations on all tables

unless there are specific table ACL rules in place to restrict such operations.

Note:  By default, the wildcard table ACL rules are the only ACL rules that check for the value of the glide.sm.default_mode property.

 If you want to control other operations with this setting, create your own ACL rules to check for this property value. See Using Access

Control Rules.

When an instance is upgraded while running the High Security plugin, the glide.sm.default_mode property is set to

Allow Access and can be changed to Deny Access.

When the High Security plugin is activated on a new instance, the glide.sm.default_mode property is set to Deny

Access.

To change the property:

1. Navigate to System Properties > Security.

2. Select Deny Access or Allow Access for the Security manager default behavior.

Page 70: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 70/196

High Security Settings 69

Security Administrator Role

When the High Security plugin is activated, a new role called security_admin is created and added to the default

System Administrator user. This role is a  peer to the admin role and, therefore, is not inherited by users who are

assigned the admin role by default (base system System Administrator, for example). This new role is marked as an

elevated privilege, which means the user who is assigned the role will need to be manually elevated to the role

during an interactive session. The security_admin role protects resources in the platform such as ACL, properties,

and records, that require security to bar access by the normal admin user.

Access Control List for Prior Versions

The following table lists Access Control List entries that were modified or created by the activation of this plugin to

enhance security in prior versions.

 Constraint

Operation

Type Access Control

sys_user_role (Roles) read all

records

€ The "maint" and "nobody" roles cannot be read by any role except "maint"

€ all other roles can only be read by users with the "role_delegator", "itil", or

"user_admin" roles

sys_user_role (Roles) delete all

records

€ The "maint" and "nobody" roles cannot be deleted by any role except "maint"

€ all other roles can only be deleted by users with the "admin" role

reset_acl_rules (Reset ACL UI

page)

read UI Page This UI page has been removed from the platform. Furthermore access to this UI page is

set to "nobody" so that existing modified pages will not be accessible

sys_app_module (Application

Modules)

write all

records

€ Only users with roles that are set in the "roles" field in the application module record

can modify it

€ The user with "admin" role can modify any application module that is set with a role

that "admin" can inherit (all roles except "maint" and "security_admin")

sys_app_application

(Application)

write all

records

€ Only users with roles that are set in the "roles" field in the application record can

modify it

€ The user with "admin" role can modify any application that is set with a role that

"admin" can inherit (all roles except "maint" and "security_admin")

sys_properties (Properties) read all

records

€ Only users with roles that are set in the "read_roles" field in the properties record can

read it

€ The user with "admin" role can read any property that is set with a role that "admin"

can inherit (all roles except "maint" and "security_admin")

sys_properties (Properties) write all

records

€ Only users with roles that are set in the "write_roles" field in the properties record can

modify it

€ The user with "admin" role can modify any property that is set with a role that

"admin" can inherit (all roles except "maint" and "security_admin")

sys_properties (Properties) delete all

records

€ Only users with roles that are set in the "write_roles" field in the properties record can

delete it

€ The user with "admin" role can delete any property that is set with a role that "admin"

can inherit (all roles except "maint" and "security_admin")

sys_security_acl (Access

Control List)

write all

records

Only users that have elevated to the "security_admin" role can modify records in

sys_security_acl table

sys_security_acl (Access

Control List)

delete all

records

Only users that have elevated to the "security_admin" role can delete records in

sys_security_acl table

sys_security_acl_role (AccessRoles)

write allrecords

Only users that have elevated to the "security_admin" role can modify records insys_security_acl_roles table

Page 71: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 71/196

High Security Settings 70

sys_security_acl_role (Access

Roles)

delete all

records

Only users that have elevated to the "security_admin" role can delete records in

sys_security_acl_roles table

migrate_security (Migrate

Security UI page)

read UI Page Access to this UI page is only granted to the user who elevates to the "security_admin"

role

syslog (Log Entry) write all

records

Modification of records to this table has been set to the "nobody" role which means

records cannot be modified

syslog (Log Entry) delete all

records

Deletion of records to this table has been set to the "nobody" role which means records

cannot be deleted

sysevent (Event) write all

records

Modification of records to this table has been set to the "nobody" role which means

records cannot be modified

sysevent (Event) delete all

records

Deletion of records to this table has been set to the "nobody" role which means records

cannot be deleted

Property Access Control

Two additional columns are created in the sys_properties (Properties) table.

€ read_roles: a comma-separated list of role names that are allowed to read all fields of this property

€ write_roles: a comma-separated list of role names that are allowed to write/modify all fields of this property

Properties listed in the Properties table have read_roles of admin, and write_roles of security_admin. This means

that users with the admin role can view and read the property values, but must elevate to the security_admin role to

modify them.

Elevated Privilege

An elevated privilege is a role that has the elevated_privilege field set to true. After the plugin is activated, a new

security_admin elevated privilege is created and assigned to the default System Administrator user. This role

grants modification access to the High Security Settings and allows the user to modify the Access Control List,

directly import XML files, and access the Scripts - Background module. A user can get an elevated privilege role in

his session only by manually elevating to it. The role is in the user's session only for the duration of the session.

Session timeout or log-out removes the role.

The security admin role with elevated privileges

A role that is an elevated_privilege

does not appear in an assigned user's

session when the user logs in. The user

must manually elevate to that role. See

the following section for details.

Page 72: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 72/196

High Security Settings 71

Elevating to a Privileged Role

When a user is assigned a role that is an elevated privilege, a lock icon appears next to the user's name in the

header.

The welcome header lock 

To elevate to a privileged role:

1. Click the icon to select the roles for

which elevated privileges are

activated. The following dialog box

appears.

Elevating to the security admin role

2. Select an elevated role and click 

OK. This grants the user elevated

privileges to all resources controlledby the role for the remainder of the

session. When the user logs out, the

elevated privileges are terminated

and must be reestablished at the next

login. When elevated privileges are

activated, the icon has an unlocked 

appearance.

Elevated privileges are activated

If the user's session expires, so

do the elevated privileges.

3. To reestablish the elevated

privilege, click the lock icon, select

the role, and click OK.

Note:  Any edits being made when the page reloads are lost.

Page 73: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 73/196

High Security Settings 72

Forcing Administrators to Manually Elevate

Administrators can enable the glide.security.strict_elevate_privilege property to force all users with the administrator

role to manually select the role that they want to elevate to when they click the lock icon. When this property is

disabled, only the security_admin role requires manual selection. When this property is enabled, all elevated roles

require manual selection.

Manually elevating to both the security admin and soap roles

Notifications

Activation of high security settings

also activates security warning

messages. The following is an example

of a message that appears after an

approval. Click Continue to complete

the action without error.

References

[1] http:/   /  www. owasp. org/  index. php/  Session_Management#Rotate_Session_Identifiers.

[2] http:/   /  wiki.service-now. com/  index. php?title=Contextual_Security

[3] http:/   /  wiki.service-now. com/  index. php?title=Web_Services

[4] https:/   /  developer.mozilla. org/  en/  the_x-frame-options_response_header

Page 74: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 74/196

73

Domain 3

Performance Metrics

Overview

You can view a wide range of performance metrics for your instance and for the machine on which your instance is

running, displayed in a graphical format. Add these graphs and their controls to your home page to monitor the

performance of your instances. Some of these graphs are intended for use by ServiceNow Technical Support to

troubleshoot performance issues or help you tune your system for maximum efficiency. Each graph enables you to

filter the data by using different measurements, such as maximum and minimum values, means, and medians. The

available graphs reflect performance in eight functional areas of ServiceNow.

€ Database

€ Discovery

€ Disk Partitions

€ Linux Stats

€ Logging

€ MySQL Overview

€ Node Metrics

€ Replication

€ ServiceNow Servlet

Page 75: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 75/196

Performance Metrics 74

Adding Performance Metrics to Your Homepage

A base system graph is available to display performance graphed over time in PST.

1. Click the Add content link in the upper left corner of your homepage.

2. In the Add content dialog box, double-click Performance Graph Controls in the list of available elements to

add Performance Graphs and Performance Graph Sets to the homepage.

3. Select Performance Graphs to add the graphs to the homepage.

4. Select each element you have moved and click on the control bars below the lists to place the performance

elements in your homepage.

For additional information about selecting and displaying items on the homepage, see Customizing Homepages.

Graph Controls

The performance graph controls that you added to your homepage allow you to adjust your view of the graphs as

follows:

Control Description

Refresh Set the refresh rate for your graphs from five minutes to one hour, or turn off the refresh feature.

Timespan

Select the amount of data to display in the graph. The time span selected shows the data for that period up to the current time.

Graph

size

Select the physical size of the graph on the page.

Set Select the graph set (functional area) to display.

CI The value in this field defaults to the name of the node (instance node ID). The list for clustered environments will contain all the nodes

in the instance, enabling you to view the performance metrics for selected nodes.

Page 76: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 76/196

Performance Metrics 75

Available Metrics

Each graph has a set of colored check boxes at the top that control the display of available data. Clear a check box to

remove that input from the chart.

Database Graphs

Database graphs display metrics for various database operations (e.g. insertions and deletions) and a current count of 

database connections for the selected ServiceNow instance. To view the details of a database, select an instance from

the CI list, and then select a database operation to view from the list of available operations above the chart. Note

that all traffic listed here is specific to your cluster node/instance. If you are looking at the database graph for your

discovery node, it will not include traffic for your UI node or vice versa. If you, like most customers, are running on

a single node, the graph will, of course, show everything.

€ Database Throughput: Displays the count (per minute) for each type of database operation (inserts, deletes, etc.)

over time.

€ Database Response: Displays the response time (in milliseconds) for each type of database operation.

€ DB Connection Use: Shows how many connections this instance has open to the database. Select to display as a

maximum, a minimum, or a mean.

Page 77: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 77/196

Performance Metrics 76

Discovery

Functionality described here requires the Discovery plugin.

Discovery metrics measure the performance of the probes and sensors in your instance as they collect information

about CIs in the network. The available measurements to apply are count , maximum, mean, median, and minimum.

All times in these charts are measured in milliseconds.

€ Discovery Probe Run Time: Elapsed time, in milliseconds, that probes take to run. Use this chart to check the

performance of your MID Server. Slow run times can indicate a resource problem on the MID Server machine.

€ Discovery Sensor Queue Time: Indicates how long a sensor task sits in the scheduler queue on the instance

before it runs.

€ Discovery Sensor Run Time: Measures how long a sensor task takes to run after it is started.

Page 78: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 78/196

Performance Metrics 77

Disk Partitions

Select Disk Partitions to view the input and output statistics for partitions on the server hosting your ServiceNow

instance. The available measurements are the read and write requests per minute and the number of bytes read and

written per minute.

Selecting a Partition

You can display the statistics for each partition or the cumulative totals for all partitions. To view cumulative I/O for

the entire disk, select the first line in the drop-down list in the CI field. Select one of the individual partitions from

the list to view the statistics for that partition alone.

Four of the disk partitions that appear in the list are generated as business services and are used to populate the

performance graphs with data. If they are deleted, the instance automatically regenerates them. They appear in the

list of Business Services as shown here:

Page 79: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 79/196

Performance Metrics 78

The list of disk partitions generated by the platform appear in the performance graphs as shown below:

Linux Stats

The Linux Stats graph displays performance data for the server on which your ServiceNow instance is running.

ServiceNow uses these graphs as a tool to locate and resolve issues with your instance.

€ CPU Usage: The measurement of this chart indicates the percentage of the available CPUs that are running on

this machine. This is aggregated data and indicates what portion of the machine's resources are being used at any

given time. The most useful metric on this chart is the IOWait time measurement, which can indicate

performance issues.

€ Load: The load on the Linux machine indicates the average sum of the number of process waiting plus those

processes executing over increments of 1 minute, 5 minutes, and 15 minutes.

CPU Usage Metrics

The following selections are available for CPU metrics:

€ Idle: No threads are running. This indicates the percentage of the machine's CPUs that are idle.

€ IOWait: Indicates how long the CPU spends in a waiting state for disk or network I/O.

€ Nice: View threads with a modified (lower) scheduling priority that configures them to be run when time permits.

€ System: Displays the percentage of a single CPU that is being used to run system threads.

€ User: Displays threads initiated by the application (the instance and the database).

Page 80: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 80/196

Performance Metrics 79

Logging

The charts of logging activity display the mean error log count and the mean number of logs created per minute

within the configured time period. The error logging rate is the most important metric in this group.

Page 81: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 81/196

Performance Metrics 80

MySQL Overview

The charts in the mySQL Overview display are an aggregate view of all traffic going to your database server. This is

distinct from the charts under the Database section which monitor only queries originating at your particular

application instance.

€ mySQL Statements: Displays all the database activity - deletes, inserts, selects, and updates.

€ mySQL Threads: Measures the number of connections to the database and how many active threads are running

on the database.

€ mySQL Statement - writes: Displays only the database write actions: deletes, inserts, and updates. The select 

action represents a large portion of the activity, and removing this view makes it easier to analyze the write

actions.

€ mySQL Table Locks waited: Displays the number of table locks per second over the configured time period.

This is a very important metric to monitor. The more table locks that exist, the lower the performance.

Node Metrics

Node Metrics displays a set of baseline performance and throughput metrics for a particular application instance

and/or cluster node. Note that most customers are not, in fact, running in a clustered configuration, but you will still

have data here since the system treats those instances as a cluster with only one node.

Those customers running with multiple cluster nodes will be able to view different metrics for each node on their

cluster by changing the CI in the graph control.

€ Response Time: Displays the maximum, median, and minimum response time for database queries by the

selected node in milliseconds.

€ Events Logged: Shows the mean number of the events queued and added to the event log by ServiceNow in the

selected time period.

€ Events Processed: Shows the mean number of the events actually processed by ServiceNow in the selected time

period.

€ Transactions: Displays the total number of database transactions per minute by the selected node.

€ Semaphore Use: Shows the number of semaphores in use by the selected node. Semaphores control the number

of user transactions that can be run in parallel.€ DB Connection Use: View the maximum, median, and minimum number of database connections in use by the

selected node.

Page 82: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 82/196

Performance Metrics 81

Replication

Replication is the process whereby an entire instance is replicated on a second machine for failover protection. The

Replication Throughput graph measures the difference in the data (delta) between the production instance and the

replicated instance as user activity changes the database. ServiceNow Technical Support uses this information to

monitor the progress of replicating a customer's instance.

ServiceNow Servlet

Each ServiceNow instance has a servlet.

€ Sessions: The session data graph can display existing sessions, including those initiated by the MID Server and

external integrations

€ Transactions:Displays all transactions initiated by users, the MID Server, and external integrations.

€ Response Time:Displays the interval (in milliseconds) between the time the instance receives a transaction and

the time the instance responds.

€ Java Memory: Records memory usage and indicates when the instance is running out of memory. This is a very

useful problem indicator.

€ CPU Usage: Shows aggregated CPU usage for all the instances on the machine. This information is used by

ServiceNow Technical Support to troubleshoot performance issues.

€ Scheduler: Displays all scheduler activity for the selected instance, including Discovery probes. You can

determine the backlog of scheduled jobs in the queue for a particular time period and compare that against the rate

at which the jobs are being processed during the same period.

Page 83: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 83/196

Performance Metrics 82

Creating Reports

Overview

ServiceNow puts the power of report creation in the hands of every user of the system. Administrators can create

reports that are viewable by specific groups, or by everybody. Individual users can create custom reports that they

can access at any time. Reports can be scheduled for email delivery at specific times of the day, week or month,

internally and externally. Any report can be made into a gauge which can be added to a ServiceNow homepage.

Combine these powerful features with over 60 customizable, commonly used reports that are delivered with

ServiceNow, and you have the most robust native reporting tool available in any ITSM application on the market

today.

Enhancements

Calgary

The following enhancements are available with the Calgary release.

€ A new Export to PDF button appears on the reporting form. Users who can export reports can use this button to

create a PDF of a report directly from the report form.

€ Users who can edit a report can share a report with multiple users or groups.

€ Changing the visibility of a report now updates the original report. Changing the visibility of a report without the

permissions necessary to edit that report generates a new report instead.

€ Users who can edit a report can disable the report details block on PDF exports of that report.

€ The Save as button on the report form now appears as Insert. The behavior of this button did not change.

€ A Tiny option is now available from the Chart size choice list. The Tiny chart size is approximately one half the

size of the Small chart size.

€ Certain elements on the report form have moved to accommodate other changes.

Page 84: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 84/196

Creating Reports 83

Running Reports

Reports can be accessed through the left navigation bar. Here are some quick definitions of the modules in the

Report application:

€ View/Run - The list of available reports. This list will be based on the role the logged in user has to access

individual reports. From this list users can either create a new report or click on any available report to run it.

€ Chart Colors - The colors of specific sets of data in viewed graphical reports. Once any graphical report is

rendered in ServiceNow, a list of records will be added to this table showing the attributes of what report, what

data set and what color is displayed on that report. By clicking into any of these records, you can adjust the color

used in the report.

€ Color Definition - The available colors which can be accessed for graphical reports. ServiceNow comes with 143

predefined colors; you can create new ones if you choose, or use this list as a reference guide for customizing the

look of your existing graphical reports.

€ Scheduled Reports - This is the list of reports that have been scheduled to run at specific times. If an individual is

receiving a report at a specific interval, this is where you'll find it scheduled.

Creating a Report

1. From the left navigation pane, select Reports > View/Run.

2. Click the button at the top of the list.3. Define the parameters of the report.

4. Click the Save or Insert button.

Note: When saving a report, avoid characters such as '&', ';', or ','.

Editing an Existing Report

1. From the left navigation pane, select Reports > View/Run.

2. Open a report from the list.

3. Adjust any parameters as needed.

4. Save the report, and then return to the report list.

€ Update - Overwrite initial report, returning to the report list

€ Save - Overwrite initial report, staying on the report form

€ Insert - Create a new report. Be sure to change the name

Note:  If a non-admin user is viewing a global report, clicking Update or Save will not overwrite the initial report: instead, it will

save/update a personalized version of a report belonging to the user.

Page 85: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 85/196

Creating Reports 84

Creating a Report from a List

1. Navigate to the list for which you want to create a report.

2. Right click on the column header you want to group your report by.

3. Select Pie Chart or Bar Chart from the drop-down menu.

4. Click the icon to the left of the Reports link.

5. Save the report:

€ Update - Overwrite initial report, staying on the report form

€ Save - Overwrite initial report, returning to the report list

€ Insert - Create a new report. Be sure to change the name, and then return to the report list

Scheduling Reports

Note: You can grant non-admin users rights to schedule reports with the report_scheduler role.

Scheduling reports is a powerful way to automate distribution of the current status of your database tables. Instead of 

spending time creating Access or Excel reports and emailing them to team members or executives, you can create a

report and let ServiceNow periodically run it and email the output to the appropriate parties automatically.

1. Open a report that you want to schedule for distribution.

2. Click the Schedule at the top of the report.

3. Select the Users, Groups, or any undefined email addresses you want the report to reach.

4. Define the interval and time you want the report to be distributed at.

5. Define a subject for the email.

6. Define any text information you want to accompany the report, which is sent as an attachment to the email.

7. Choose an output Type for the report.

8. Check the Zip Outputbox send the output as a .zip file.

9. Click Submit.

Note:  A scheduled report may not display any data if the report author has a deactivated user account or their role has changed. To

ensure that scheduled reports always run, verify that the Created by field always displays an active user.

Reports are distributed via email. Calendar reports are not currently supported for automatic emailing.

Available report output Type field selections are PDF, PDF-landscape, Excel, CVS, and PNG. Graphical reports

are sent as .png or .pdf files and text reports (lists) are sent as .pdf files. When scheduling a graphical report to beemailed, select output type PDF or PDF-landscape to include the chart grid data. (Include Grid should be checked

on the report.)

A user must have Notification set to "Email" on their user record to receive reports. An exception to the above is that

an email address directly specified in the "To these addresses" field will always receive the report, even if there's a

matching user record for that address that says "Do not notify".

You can add the Include detail field by personalizing the form. Selecting the Include detail field for a list report

includes a form view for all records from the selected list in the report.

Note: To change the time zone of a scheduled report, run as a user with the desired time zone.

Page 86: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 86/196

Creating Reports 85

Scheduling Multiple Reports

To schedule multiple reports:

1. Navigate to Reports > Scheduled Reports and click New.

2. Populate the form.

3. Save the record.

4. Use the Included in Email related list to create additional scheduled reports.

The Included in Email related list will include those reports when the parent report is emailed.

Scheduling Reports as a Report

Scheduled reports are distributed as attachments of different kinds.

To send the report as a link:

1. Navigate to Reports > Scheduled Reports and click New.

2. Populate the form, leaving the Report reference blank.

3. Get the sys_id of the desired report and put the link in the Introductory Message field.

€ To link the user directly to the report, substituting the instance name and sys_id.

https:/   /  INSTANCENAME. service-now.com/  sys_report_display.do?sysparm_report_id=SYSID.

€ To link the user to the report in the frameset:

https:/    /   INSTANCENAME.  service-now.  com/   nav_to.  do?url=sys_report_display.

do?sysparm_report_id=SYSID.

Configuring Thresholds

You can modify the threshold, which determines how many bars or pie wedges are displayed in a chart, or you can

remove the other grouping entirely from your report. The Other Threshhold does not take effect if stacked fields

are specified. In Pivot Table Reports, it applies only to columns, not to rows.

The threshhold default value is displayed directly in the form:

Page 87: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 87/196

Creating Reports 86

Administration

The glide.ui.report_expand_header property controls who has access to expand or collapse the report header,

where a report is defined and built. It is a comma-separated list of roles. Default is public, meaning everyone. Find

this property in System Properties > UI Properties with the description, List of roles (comma-separated) that

can expand the report header. If this property does not exist in your instance, you can add a Property to the table.

Note: There is a user preference called 'report.expanded' that may override this behavior. For this property to work correctly, set the

global report.expanded user preference to false and delete all individual user preference settings for report.expanded 

that override this behavior. You can manage user preferences under the User Administration application.

Bar Chart Orientation

By default, a bar chart will be drawn vertically when the number of bars to be drawn is less than 10. If there are more

than 10 data groups, the chart will be drawn horizontally. However, you can force either a horizontal or vertical bar

chart orientation in the Type field when creating a report.

Sharing Reports

You can share a report with multiple groups or users starting with the Calgary release. In releases prior to Calgary,

you can share a report with only one group. To share a report with multiple groups and users:

1. From the Visible to field, select Groups and Users.

2. Add user groups or individual users in the respective fields.

Page 88: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 88/196

Creating Reports 87

Publishing Reports

You can make a report visible to anyone - without requiring a login. Users need the report_publisher role to see the

Publish button.

1. Select the report you want to publish.

2. Click Publish.

3. Copy the link and paste it where you want to distribute it. The info message will look similar to this:

Use the following URL for the public report:

https:/    /   www. service-now.  com/   demo/   sys_report_display.

do?sysparm_report_id=15dfdc80c611227b0127d4d9baa00425

Notes

€ If you cannot see the data of the report when logged out of the system this is probably because you do not have a

public role on the table being reported on.

€ If the report has already been published, the Publish button is not available.

€ You can see a list of published reports by navigating to Reports > Published Reports. This module is inactive

out-of-box. From the module, you can right-click a report in the list to see its Published URL.

€ When scheduling a report, the name you enter for Run As must have permission to view the records.

Page 89: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 89/196

Page 90: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 90/196

Defining an SLA 89

Defining an SLA

Overview

Service Level Agreements (SLAs) allow the service desk to track whether or not their representatives are providing a

certain level of service. The most common use of SLAs is to ensure that incidents are resolved within a certain

amount of time.

A Service Offering SLA is an SLA that applies only to service offerings for business services (requires Service

Portfolio Management plugin and Service Portfolio Management - SLA Commitments plugin). To define a service

offering SLA, navigate to Business Services > Service Offering SLAs > SLAs.

OLAs and Underpinning Contracts

The Task SLA engine provided by the plugin can also be used to define OLAs or Underpinning Contracts in exactly

the same way as SLAs. The only difference between SLAs, OLAs, and Underpinning Contracts is the Type field on

the Task SLA form. Changing the type field does not change the behavior of the Task SLA.

For an example of an OLA, see Defining an OLA for Catalog Fulfillment.

Defining an SLA

When defining an SLA, the Duration field, in coordination with the Schedule field, is critical. For example, select a

5 day 2 hour duration and a 9-5 schedule. The 5 days and 2 hours are considered 122 hours (5x24 + 2). The 122

hours are distributed across the 9-5 schedule at 8 hours per day resulting in 15.25 schedule days (122/8 = 15.25).

To define an SLA:

1. Navigate to Service Level Management > SLA Definitions.2. Click New.

3. Fill in the form.

Field Input Value

Name An identifying name for the SLA.

Type The type of agreement being defined. This is used for informational purposes and does not change the behavior of the SLA. Choices

are:

€ SLA

€ OLA

€ Underpinning Contract

Table The task table (table extending Task Table) whose records will be tracked by this SLA.

Workflow The SLA workflow that determines what activities occur in response to the SLA. For more information, see Creating an SLA

Workflow.

Duration

Type

Determines how the duration of the SLA will be calculated. This can be a User Defined Duration, or a Relative Duration (e.g. "end

of next business day.").

Duration If Duration Type is User Defined Duration, this is the length of time the SLA will run before it is marked Breached. Note: The

number of days specified in this field are converted into 24 hours. Thus, if a schedule is used (see next field) that has eight hour days,

the duration 1 Day will set the SLA to breach three business days later.

Schedule The hours during which the SLA should time. This allows SLAs to be defined which only count during business hours. For more

information, see Using Schedules.

Timezone If the SLA is defined in the SLA Properties (Service Level Management > SLA Properties) as using the SLA Definition's time

zone, this field determines what time zone the SLA will use. For more information, see Using Time Zones.

Page 91: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 91/196

Defining an SLA 90

Retroactive

Start

Retroactive Start determines the SLA's behavior if it is attached to the task at a point later than the task's creation. If Retroactive

Start is true, then the SLA will time from the task's Created On date and time. If Retroactive Start is false, then the SLA will time

from the date and time that it was attached to the SLA. For example, if an Incident's Priority is changed to 1 - Critical and a Priority 1

SLA is attached at that time, Retroactive Start means that the SLA will count from when the incident was first created, rather than

from when the Incident's Priority changed.

Start

Conditions

Defines conditions (using the Condition Builder) which, if met, attach an SLA to a task on the table specified in the Table field and

begins the timing. Note that all conditions used to define an SLA are case sensitive.

Stop

Conditions

Defines conditions (using the Condition Builder) which, if met, stops the SLA's timer. If these conditions are met before the end of 

the duration defined in the Duration Type and Duration fields has elapsed, the SLA's state will be set to Achieved. If these

conditions are no longer met, the SLA will not resume. However, if the Start Conditions are met again, a new SLA will attach.

Pause

Conditions

Defines conditions (using the condition builder) which, if met, pauses the SLA's timer. Once the conditions are no longer met, the

SLA will resume. Pause conditions are not compatible with Relative Durations.

 Fields which can be added by personalizing the form:

Condition

class

Accepts the string value of an SLA Condition Rules record to use instead of the global Condition Rules. If blank, the global rules will

be used. For more information, see Modifying SLA Condition Rules.

Reset

Conditions

Defines conditions (using the Condition Builder) which, if met, completes the current SLA and starts a new one.

Example

This example will demonstrate how to use the SLA Plugin to create a Service Level Agreement to ensure that critical

incidents logged in Paris are handled within 1 business day. This example uses the demo data within the system.

Defining the SLA

To define the SLA, navigate to Service Level Management > SLA Definitions, and click new.

Populate the fields with the following:

€ Name - Name the incident Priority 1 Paris Incident.

€ Type - Specify the type as SLA. Although the type does not change the behavior of the SLA, the type will help

distinguish between agreements with customers, vendors, and internal departments.

€ Workflow - Select Default SLA Workflow. To learn how to create a custom Workflow for SLAs, click Creating

a Service Level Management Workflow.

€ Duration Type - Select End of next business day. This means that, regardless of when the ticket is opened, the

SLA will calculate the end of the next business day and set that as the deadline for the SLA.

€ Schedule - Select 8-5 weekdays. This means that the timer will run between the hours of 8 and 5 on weekdays.

Once those fields are populated, it is important to populate the condition fields:€ Start Condition - Set the following conditions: Location is Paris, Priority is 1 - Critical, and Active is True.

Now the SLA will attach to any active Priority 1 incidents in Paris.

€ Stop Condition - Set the condition Active is False. This means that once the incident is closed or resolved, the

SLA will stop tracking time.

€ Pause Condition - Set the conditions Incident is one of Awaiting Problem, Awaiting User Info, or Awaiting

Evidence. This will avoid tracking time while the service desk is waiting for outside events.

The form should look like this:

Page 92: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 92/196

Defining an SLA 91

The result is that whenever an incident is listed as being Priority 1 incident in Paris, the following workflow will be

launched:

The workflow will run, pausing if the incident is awaiting user info or evidence, and will be completed if the incident

becomes inactive.

Testing the Service Level Agreement

To test the new SLA:

1. Navigate to Incident > Create New.2. Set Priority to 1 - Critical, and Location to Paris.

3. Save the incident.

4. Reload the form.

Page 93: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 93/196

Defining an SLA 92

Once the incident is saved, a related list of Task SLAs will appear at the bottom, with both the Priority 1 Paris

Incident SLA and the out-of-box Priority 1 Response SLA:

Clicking on the Priority 1 Paris Incident SLA will display information about this instance of the Task SLA:

Clicking the Show Workflow link will display the workflow attached to the SLA's progress:

Page 94: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 94/196

Defining an SLA 93

Creating an SLA Workflow

Overview

Functionality described here requires the Service Level Agreements (SLA) plugin.

The base system workflow that comes with the plugin is Default SLA Workflow:

This example creates a new Urgent SLA workflow to be used for a priority one ticket.

Creating an SLA Workflow

To create an SLA workflow, navigate to Service Level Management > Workflow Editor. This launches the

Graphical Workflow Editor. Select New in the top left, and populate the first form as follows:

€ Name: Urgent SLA Workflow.

€ Table: Task SLA [task_sla]. All SLA workflows must be on the Task SLA table regardless of what table the SLAwill be running against.

€ If Condition Matches:  None. Because no conditions will be specified since it is set to none, the SLA will not run

unless specified by a particular SLA. Note that if this option is not set to None, the workflow runs on any task_sla

record that meets these conditions. If no conditions are specified, the workflow attaches to all new task_sla

records.

The form should now look like this:

Page 95: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 95/196

Creating an SLA Workflow 94

Click Update. There is now a workflow with a beginning and end. Now it is time to specify what will happen when

the Urgent SLA workflow is triggered.

Suppose the desired process is:€ After 33% of the SLA's duration, alert the user assigned to responding to the task.

€ After 66% of the SLA's duration, notify the assignee's manager.

€ After 100% of the SLA's duration, notify the Customer Care representative that the SLA has been breached.

To define that process as a workflow:

1. Drag the activity SLA Percentage Timer onto the arrow between Begin and End.

2. Name the activity 33% Timer and enter 33 in the Percentage field.

3. Drag the activity Notification into the empty space below the 33% Timer activity.

4. Name the activity Notify Assignee.

5. Click the lock icon on the To field, select the variable picker ( ), and select Task SLA > Task > Assigned

To.

Enter a subject and email body as necessary.

Page 96: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 96/196

Creating an SLA Workflow 95

6. Click the yellow box on the side of the 33% Timer activity and drag to the new notification box. This creates a

second arrow from 33% Timer to the new notification:

7. Drag the activity SLA Percentage Timer onto the arrow between 33% Timer and End.

8. Name the activity 33% Timer 2 and enter 33 in the Percentage field.

9. Drag the activity Notification into the empty space below 33% Timer 2 activity.

10. Name the activity Notify Assignee's Manager.

11. Click the lock icon on the To field and select Task SLA > Task > Assigned To > Manager.

12. Click Submit.

13. Drag an arrow from 33% Timer 2 to the new notification box.

14. Drag the activity SLA Percentage Timer onto the arrow between 33% Timer 2 and End.

15. Name the activity 33% Timer 3 and place 33 in the Percentage field.

16. Drag the activity Notification into the empty space below the 33% Timer 2 activity.

17. Name the activity Notify Customer Care.

18. Click the lock icon on the To field, locate the Enter Email Address field, and enter

[email protected].

19. Click Submit.

20. Drag an arrow from 33% Timer 3 to the new notification box.

The workflow should now look like this:

Page 97: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 97/196

Creating an SLA Workflow 96

21. Click the Workflow Actions icon and select Publish.

The workflow will now be available to any SLA, and can be edited at any time by opening the workflow editor,

opening the workflow, and checking it out.

Events and Email Notification

Overview

One use for system events in the ServiceNow platform is to control email notification for system activity, such as

when incident records are updated, or change requests are assigned. There are a number of useful events included in

the platform that provides you with a broad view of application activity, but these events might not give you the

detailed view you need or may not suit a customized system. If existing events do not meet your needs, you can

create your own events to watch for specific changes to ServiceNow records. For details on using events to notify

people of system activity, see Email Notifications. For instructions on creating and sending custom emails when

ServiceNow events occur, see the tasks in Email Notifications.

Enhancements

Berlin

The following enhancements are available as of the Berlin release:

€ Notifications no longer require creating a custom business rule and event. See Email Notifications for information

on the creating notifications without creating custom business rules and events.

€ Event-based notifications include the Sys ID of the user as parm1 and the user name as parm2

€ The event state transferred indicates that ServiceNow rotated an event to a different shard of the Event[sysevent] table.

Page 98: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 98/196

Events and Email Notification 97

Business Rules

A business rule is a piece of JavaScript that you can configure to run when a record is inserted, updated, or deleted,

or as part of a table query. All business rules run either before or after the database action has occurred. Event-based

notifications add event records to the event queue using the following script logis.

If [something is true], then [add a specific event to the queue]

To create a new business rule navigate to System Definition > Business Rules and enter values for the following

fields (see table).

 Field Input Value

Name A descriptive name for your business rule. For example, Service Catalog Comments.

Table Select the appropriate database table for this business rule. For example, Request [sc_request].

Order Type the sequence in which this business rule should run. If there are multiple rules on a particular activity, then the rules will run in the

order specified here, from lowest to highest.

Active Select the check box (true) to enable this business rule.

When Select when this business rule should execute: before, at the same time, or after the database operation is complete. For example, select

after to run the business rule after completing database operations.

Insert Select this checkbox to execute the business rule when adding a record into the database.

Update Select this checkbox to execute the business rule when updating a record. For example, to update an existing Service Catalog request,

select this check box.

Delete Select this checkbox to execute the business rule when deleting a record from the database.

Query Select this checkbox to execute the business rule when querying a table.

Condition Enter a JavaScript condition under which the business rule runs. By adding the condition statement to this field, ServiceNow only runs

the logic in the Script field when this condition is true. If you decide to include the condition statement in the script, leave this field

blank.

Script Enter the JavaScript you want to run when the condition you define is true.

Page 99: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 99/196

Events and Email Notification 98

Building a Script

The incident events business rule comes with the system and defines a number of events that can be triggered by

different actions in the Incident table.

This business rule defines several events, three of which are triggered after a record in the Incident table is inserted

or updated. The first script is:

if (current.operation() != 'insert' && current.comments.changes()) {

gs.eventQueue("incident.commented", current, gs.getUserID(),gs.getUserName());

}

The condition in this script requires that a change be made to the Comments field in an existing (not inserted)

incident record. If this condition is true, then ServiceNow adds the incident.commented event to the event queue.

The second condition requires that a record be inserted before the event is added to the queue.

if (current.operation() =='insert') {

The third condition is true whenever the incident record is updated (including updates to the Comments field, as

specified by the first script).

if (current.operation() == 'update')

The then part of each script, the gs.eventQueue function, adds the event to the event queue. This statement uses the

following syntax, set off with braces:

gs.eventQueue("incident.updated", current, gs.getUserID(),

gs.getUserName());

The gs.eventQueue function takes the following parameters:

Page 100: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 100/196

Events and Email Notification 99

 Field Input Value

Name The name of the event triggered, set in quotation marks

Record The record referenced when the condition in the script evaluates to true. Usually this is expressed as current, meaning the current record

the business rule is working on. If the business rule is being triggered as part of a scheduled job, use a GlideRecord argument in its place.

Parm1 Passes a string value. Notification events pass the Sys ID of the user with the gs.getUserID() method (Berlin release). Other scripts can

reference this string value as parm1 using the format ${event.parm1}.

Parm2 Passes a string value. Notification events pass the user name with the gs.getUserName() method (Berlin release). Other scripts can

reference this string values as parm2 using the format ${event.parm2}.

Create a New Event

Administrators can create a custom event to send an email notification if an existing business rule does not provide

the necessary event. For example, you might want to notify people who initiate a Service Catalog request whenever a

comment is added to that request.

It is a best practice to verify there is not an existing event you can use.

1. Navigate to System Policy > Events > Registry.

2. Filter the list on the table your event will affect. For example, select the Requests [sc_request] table.

3. Review the events for the table and determine if there is an existing event you can use.

If you do not find a suitable existing event, you can create your own.

1. Navigate to System Policy > Events > Registry.

2. Click New and fill in the form.

3. Click the Business Rules related link.

4. Select the event business rule for the table. For example, select the sc request events business rule to create a

custom Request event.5. In the Script field, add custom event JavaScript (see sample).

6. Click Update.

Sample Event Script

The following sample script adds an request.commented event with the user's Sys ID as parm1 and the user's user

name for parm2.

if (current.operation() != ‚insert‚ && current.comments.changes()) {

gs.eventQueue(ƒrequest.commented„, current, gs.getUserID(),

gs.getUserName());}

Event States

Events may exist in one of several states:

Page 101: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 101/196

Events and Email Notification 100

 State Description

Ready ServiceNow created the event and is it is in queue waiting to be processed.

Processed The event successfully ran. An event does not necessarily trigger any further action when processed. Additional functionality must

make use of the event.

Error The event encountered an error durring processing. This state is often caused by invalid event parameters.

Transferred The event was rotated to a different shard of the Event [sysevent] table. When an event is rotated, a duplicate record is created in the

active shard. The Transferred state was added with the Berlin Release.

Global Events

ServiceNow has a global function called global_events() that triggers from a business rule when these3 conditions

occur:

€ Inserting new records

€ Updating existing records

€ Adding comments to an existing record

€ Assigning a record to a user

€ Exceeding a record's inactive timer

For example, if you add the script global.events(current) to a business rule on the change_request table,

ServiceNow automatically configures the following events:

€ change_request.inserted

€ change_request.updated

€ change_request.commented

€ change_ request.assigned

€ change_ request.inactiveThe business rule for global events on the change_request table looks like this:

Sample Scripts from the change events Business Rule

The following scripts are found in the baseline change events business rule. This business rule defines events that

fire after a change request is inserted or updated.

if (current.operation() == 'insert') {

 gs.eventQueue("change.inserted", current, gs.getUserID(),

gs.getUserName());

}

Page 102: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 102/196

Events and Email Notification 101

if (current.operation() == 'update') {

 gs.eventQueue("change.updated", current, gs.getUserID(),

gs.getUserName());

}

if (!current.assigned_to.nil() && current.assigned_to.changes()) {

  gs.eventQueue("change.assigned", current,

current.assigned_to.getDisplayValue() ,

previous.assigned_to.getDisplayValue());

}

if (current.priority.changes() && current.priority == 1) {

  gs.eventQueue("change.priority.1", current, current.priority,

previous.priority);

}

if (current.risk.changes() && current.risk== 1) {

  gs.eventQueue("change.risk.1", current, current.risk, previous.risk);

 

}

if (current.start_date.changes() || current.end_date.changes() || 

current.assigned_to.changes()) {

if (!current.start_date.nil() && !current.end_date.nil() && 

!current.assigned_to.nil()) {

  gs.eventQueue("change.calendar.notify", current,current.assigned_to, previous.assigned_to);

  }

  // Remove from previous assigned to, due to assigned_to changing 

  if (!previous.assigned_to.nil()) {

  if (!current.assigned_to.nil() && current.assigned_to.changes()

&& 

(!previous.start_date.nil() && !previous.end_date.nil())) {

 

gs.eventQueue("change.calendar.notify.remove", current,current.assigned_to, previous.assigned_to);

  }

  }

  // Remove old calendar from current assigned to, due to date changing 

  else if (!current.assigned_to.nil()) {

  if ((current.start_date.changes() && !previous.start_date.nil())

|| 

(current.end_date.changes() && !previous.end_date.nil())) {

  gs.eventQueue("change.calendar.notify.remove", current,

current.assigned_to, current.assigned_to);

  }

Page 103: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 103/196

Events and Email Notification 102

  }

}

Using the Knowledge Base

Overview

All users of the ServiceNow application can access the knowledge portal to search for and view role-appropriate

articles. The specific application and modules available vary by role.

The separate Employee Self-Service portal allows employees to access knowledge articles outside the full

ServiceNow application.

Accessing Knowledge

View role-appropriate knowledge articles from these locations.

€ Knowledge portal: every ServiceNow user can access the knowledge portal through one of these paths:

Self-Service > Knowledge, Service Desk > Knowledge, or Knowledge Base > View. The portal lists the most

recent articles arranged by topic.

€ Knowledge base list: users who click a topic's View all items link on the knowledge portal see a list of all

articles in that topic that have not passed their valid to date. Unlike a record list, users cannot alter knowledge

base entries with the list editor.

€ Global text search: users whose roles permit access to global text search can find knowledge articles along with

tasks, policies, service catalog items, and other records. Administrators can tailor which tables are searched.

€ Homepages: each user has a homepage that appears by default, typically filled with reports, selected knowledge

topics, and other commonly used functions. Users can personalize and rearrange their homepage based on what

information is most useful to them.

Page 104: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 104/196

Using the Knowledge Base 103

€ Content pages: the knowledge management team can create content pages that serve as a customer interface for

the knowledge base.

€ Forms that contain the knowledge icon: users can click the knowledge icon ( ) that appears in some forms to

initiate a knowledge search for the text in the adjacent field. This icon appears by default beside the Short

description field on the Incident and Problem forms. Administrators can configure other forms to include the

knowledge icon, as well.

€ Reporting: users can easily generate role-appropriate reports on knowledge feedback, development, and usage in

a variety of formats. These reports can be scheduled for email distribution, or added to homepages or content

pages. Users click a report element for a list of related knowledge articles.

€ Known errors: problems can be marked as known errors which adds them under Problem > Known Errors,

providing quick reference. Although items in the Problem > Known Errors module are not part of the

knowledge base, this information is important to the knowledge centered support (KCS).

Viewing Knowledge Articles

Click a title to view the article.

In addition to the article's content, the page may show these elements, depending on administrator settings:

€ Breadcrumbs that show the article's topic and category.

€ Article number, date published, and date last modified.

€ Feedback area with up to four feedback options and previous user comments, if any.

€ List of affected products and related tasks (such as incidents or problems).

€ Permalink URL that can be shared to give others quick access to the article.

Page 105: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 105/196

Using the Knowledge Base 104

Searching the Knowledge Base

Find a specific article by searching the knowledge base in one of these ways:

€ Knowledge search: the search field above the knowledge page searches knowledge articles and their attachments

by default. This search, available to all users, lets users filter, organize, and refine search results. Use advanced

search to filter search results by topic, category, and search location. Administrators can restrict this function.

€ Global text search: available to users with role-based permissions, the global text search field in the banner

frame searches the knowledge base as well as other types of records to which the user has access rights.

€ Forms: the search knowledge icon ( ), which appears on some forms, launches a knowledge search for the text

in the adjacent field. This icon appears beside the Short description field on the Incident and Problem forms by

default; administrators may add it to other forms. The search results and articles appear in a pop-up window. You

can click the Attach to Task button (the word task is replaced by the task name) in an article to add information

about the article to the associated task record.

€ Content pages: created with the Content Management System (CMS), content pages can include knowledge

search options.

Note:  Knowledge search terms are stemmed  [1] , meaning that searches may return similar words.

Giving Article Feedback

One or more feedback options may appear at the bottom right of the article, depending on administrator settings.

Each option permits a specific type of feedback.

Responding Yes to the "Was This Helpful?" question displays a Thank You message and opens the feedback field.

Enter comments if desired.

Responding "'No"' to the same question displays a Thank You message and opens the feedback field. This selection

may also display a Create Incident link, depending on administrator settings.

Page 106: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 106/196

Using the Knowledge Base 105

Clicking the Create Incident link creates an incident record that contains the knowledge search that led to the

article.

In the five-star rating area, move the mouse over the stars to display a rating preview in the header. Click a rating to

select it.

Select the Flag article check box to call the article to the attention of the knowledge management team. Selecting

the Flag article check box makes the Feedback field mandatory. Enter comments to help the knowledge

management team update the article appropriately.

Page 107: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 107/196

Using the Knowledge Base 106

References

[1] http:/   /  en. wikipedia. org/  wiki/  Stemming

Creating Knowledge

Overview

The ServiceNow knowledge base houses the information an organization needs to keep and share. For example, it

might include desktop support information, company/department processes and procedures, and documentation on

internally developed applications.

Add information to the knowledge base by:

€ Creating articles manually.

€ Creating articles automatically from an incident.

€ Creating articles automatically from a problem.

€ Creating articles automatically from events.

€ Linking to or importing content stored in another knowledge base.

€ Publishing managed documents to the knowledge base

By default, most new articles are created as drafts and move through a review state before they are published. Some

exceptions to the standard workflow include posting news from the Problem form and creating an article from an

event.

If the administrator enables the optional knowledge submission workflow, articles created from incidents or

problems become knowledge submissions, which are processed through a different path. For more information, see

Knowledge Workflow.

Page 108: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 108/196

Creating Knowledge 107

Creating Knowledge Manually

Users with the admin, knowledge_admin, or knowledge role can create knowledge base articles directly in the

Knowledge form.

1. Navigate to Knowledge Base > Create New.

2. Select a Topic and Category for the article.

3. Enter a Short description to identify the article in the knowledge portal and search results.

4. In the Text field, enter the article's content.

Use HTML or Wiki Markup to format the content, according to the Article type selection.

5. Fill in other fields on the form, as appropriate (see table).

6. Click Submit.

This table describes all fields and buttons on the Knowledge form. The descriptions identify fields that are available

only to users with specific roles.

 Field Input Value

Number Do not modify. The record number is assigned by the system and should not be changed.

Topic Select the topic in which the article should appear in the knowledge portal. To add options, right-click the field label and choose

Personalize Choices.

Category Select a category to further organize articles in the knowledge portal. Available categories depend on the selected topic. To add

options, right-click the field label and select Personalize Choices.

Published Enter the date the article was published. The current date is used by default.

Valid to Enter the date when the article expires. Only Published articles within the valid date range are visible to most users. ServiceNow

supplies a default date. To change the default date, right-click the field label and choose Personalize Dictionary.

This field is available only to users with the admin role.

Page 109: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 109/196

Creating Knowledge 108

Image Click the reference lookup icon ( ) to select an image that was previously uploaded to the ServiceNow database. The image

appears as an icon beside the article name in the knowledge portal.

This field is available only to users with the admin role.

Article type Select the markup language to use for formatting the article:

€ HTML: the Text field offers a WYSIWYG interface with a toolbar to apply formatting and create links. Click the HTML

icon on the toolbar to display HTML mode, where you can view and format with HTML commands.

€ Wiki: the Text field offers Wikitext icon that toggles between a preview of the formatted text and an edit field where you can

enter text with Wiki markup language to define formatting.

Workflow Select the workflow state for the article: Draft, Review, or Published. Generally, only Published articles appear in the portal.

Users with role-based permissions might also see articles in the draft or review state in the portal and search results, depending on

administrator settings.

This field is available only to users with the admin role.

Source Click the reference lookup icon to select the task that formed the basis for this article, if any.

This field is available only to users with the admin role.

Roles Specify user roles to limit who can view the article. Otherwise, all users can view the article after it is published.

This field is available only to users with the admin role.

Attachment link Select this check box to have this article's link open a file attachment. To upload the attachment, click the paperclip icon in the

upper right corner. The link in the knowledge portal or search results opens the attachment instead of navigating to the text of the

article. You can link to one attachment per article.

This field is available only to users with the admin role.

Display

attachments

Select this check box to display a list of attachments below the article. Although you can link to only one attachment (see the

Attachment link field), you can attach multiple files and list them below the article in article view.

This field is available only to users with the admin role.

Short

Description

Enter text to appear as a title for the article in the knowledge portal and search results.

Text/Wiki Enter the text of the article. This area accepts either HTML or Wiki Markup, according to the selected Article type. If Article

type is HTML, you can work in WYSIWYG mode, using the toolbar above the text field to apply formatting and create links.

Click the HTML icon on the toolbar to open HTML mode, where you can view and format the text with HTML commands. See

Using HTML Fields for information on using the HTML editor.

If Article type is Wiki, click the Wikitext icon to toggle between an edit field and the formatted text. See Knowledge

Management Wiki Support for information on using wiki tags.

Update Click the Update button to save any changes made to the form and return to the article list. To save changes and stay on the form,

right-click the header bar and choose Save.

Mark Public / 

Mark Internal

Click the Mark Public button to make the article accessible to everyone. This action sets public as the role for the article.

Click the Mark Internal button to make the article accessible only to the roles specified by the administrator. If no roles are

specified, the article is available to the public and there is no change.

Search forDuplicates

Click this button to search the knowledge base for existing articles that contain similar content.

Delete Click this button to delete the knowledge article from the system. You must confirm the request before the record is deleted.

Page 110: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 110/196

Creating Knowledge 109

Making Attachments Visible

Like other records, you can add attachments to knowledge articles. By default, they appear only to users with the

admin, knowledge_admin, or knowledge role, who can view the knowledge record by navigating to Knowledge

Base > Edit or clicking the Edit Article button when viewing the article.

Select the Display Attachments check box on the Knowledge form to display a list of attachments to users viewing

the article. You might need to personalize the Knowledge form to display this field.

A list of attachments appears below the article if Display attachments is selected.

Page 111: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 111/196

Creating Knowledge 110

Creating Knowledge from an Incident

Incidents within ITIL processes often generate information that may be needed in the future. ServiceNow can

automatically submit relevant information to the knowledge management process when the incident is closed.

Select the Knowledge check box in the Incident form's the Closure Information section to enable this feature.

Closing the incident triggers the business rule Incident Create Knowledge. By default, the business rule creates a

knowledge article in the Draft workflow state. The incident Short description becomes the article Short

description. The incident Additional comments become the article Text. If the knowledge submission workflow is

enabled, the incident Short description and Additional comments become a knowledge submission instead of an

article. For more information, see Knowledge Workflow.

For example, this is an incident being closed.

And this is the resulting article as it appears in the knowledge base.

Page 112: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 112/196

Creating Knowledge 111

Creating Knowledge from a Problem

The ServiceNow Problem form includes four options for creating knowledge directly from the problem:

€ Knowledge check box

€ Communicate Workaround related link 

€ Post Knowledge related link 

€ Post News related link 

Using the Knowledge Check Box

Like incidents, problems within ITIL processes often generate information that may be needed in the future.

ServiceNow can automatically submit relevant information to the knowledge management process when a problem

is closed.

Select the Knowledge check box on the Problem form to enable this feature. Closing the problem triggers the

business rule Problem Create Knowledge. By default, the business rule creates a knowledge article in the Draft

workflow state, ready for a knowledge team member to review and publish. The problem Short description

becomes the article Short description and the problem Work notes become the article Text. If the knowledge

submission workflow is enabled, the problem Work notes become a knowledge submission instead of an article. For

more information, see Knowledge Workflow.

Communicating a Workaround

To update all incidents associated with a problem, go to the Problem form and click the Communicate

Workaround related link. This adds the problem number and the contents of the s Workaround field as a new

entry in the Activity field on all related incidents.

By default, any entries made in an incident Activity field generate an email notification to the Caller on the Incident

form. The Communicate Workaround option on the Problem form quickly and easily communicates workarounds

to multiple users from one place, eliminating the need to manually update each incident.

If group on-call rotation scheduling is in effect when you communicate a workaround, ServiceNow stops the

escalations on the associated incidents because the workaround has been communicated to the end users.

This effectively communicates knowledge to the appropriate audience, but does not create a knowledge article.

Posting Knowledge

To create a new knowledge article from a problem immediately, rather than when the problem closes, go to the

Problem form and click the Post Knowledge related link. The resulting knowledge article contains the following

information:

€ The problem number and Short description become the knowledge article Short description.

€ The problem Description and Work notes become the knowledge article Text.

€ The problem Configuration item becomes the knowledge article Configuration Item for the Affected Products

related list.

€ The article Topic is set to Known Error.

By default, ServiceNow creates a knowledge article in Draft workflow state. If the knowledge submission workflow

is enabled, the problem Short description and Work notes are placed into a knowledge submission instead of an

article. For more information, see Knowledge Workflow.

Page 113: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 113/196

Creating Knowledge 112

Posting News

To quickly create and publish a knowledge article in the News topic, go to the Problem form and click the Post

News related link. The resulting knowledge article contains the following information:

€ The problem number and Short description become the knowledge article Short description.

€ The problem Description and Work notes become the knowledge article Text.

€ The problem Configuration Item becomes the knowledge article Configuration Item for the Affected Products

related list.

By default, the Post News related link creates an article in the Published workflow state. These articles appear in

the News topic of the knowledge portal immediately.

If the knowledge submission workflow is enabled, the problem Short description and Work notes are placed into a

knowledge submission instead of an article. For more information, see Knowledge Workflow.

Modifying the UI Actions

Administrators can modify the behavior of the the Communicate Workaround, Post Knowledge, and Post News

related links. Navigate to System Definition > UI Actions and modify the record with the same name as the related

link. For more information, see UI Actions.

Accessing External Knowledge Articles

Use Knowledge Base > Navigation Add-ons to configure access to another knowledge base, either public or

private, or to a public search engine.

The process of importing knowledge base articles depends on how the source data is stored and formatted. If you

need to import knowledge content directly from another source to the ServiceNow knowledge base, please contact

your Account Executive or Professional Services consultant.

Page 114: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 114/196

Configuring Knowledge Properties 113

Configuring Knowledge Properties

Overview

Knowledge properties enable administrators to configure the look and functionality of many knowledge base

features. Access the complete set of knowledge properties by navigating to either Knowledge Base > Properties or

System Properties > Knowledge Management.

The Knowledge Management Properties page divides the available properties into these groups :

€ Knowledge portal

€ Article view

€ Knowledge search

€ Other related elements

Knowledge Portal Properties

Knowledge portal properties control the look and functionality of the portal page, which is available to all users. This

page lists recent knowledge articles and their publication dates, organized by topic. Each topic contains a View all

items link that displays the Knowledge Base list showing all articles in the topic.

Property Description

Label for knowledge portal page search site drop-down.

(glide.knowman.name )

Enter label text to identify the ServiceNow knowledge base as

the location to be searched. When a user clicks the Advanced

search link, the filter fields include an option for what to search.

By default, users can choose to search the ServiceNow

knowledge base, identified by this label, or the ServiceNow wiki,

or selected other search sites.

Number of columns on Knowledge portal pages.

(glide.knowman.columns )

Set the number of columns for arranging topics on the knowledge

portal.

Omit empty Knowledge topics and categories.

(glide.knowman.show_only_populated )

Select the Yes check box to display topic sections only if there

are articles for the topic. Clear the check box to show all topic

sections, even those with no assigned articles.

Show Knowledge section descriptions.

(glide.knowman.show_descriptions )

Select the Yes check box to display topic descriptions in the

knowledge portal. To enter these descriptions:

1. Edit an existing knowledge article.

2. Right-click the Topic field label and choose Show Choice

List.

3. Open the record for the topic name and enter the description

into the Hint field.

Clear the check box to omit section descriptions from the

knowledge portal.

Number of Knowledge Base items to preview in a section.

(glide.knowman.section_limit )

Set the maximum number of articles per topic for the knowledge

portal. The specific articles shown depends on the Knowledge

section sort field property setting.

Page 115: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 115/196

Configuring Knowledge Properties 114

Knowledge section sort field. (glide.knowman.section_sort ) Select the default order for articles within each topic section on

the knowledge portal.

€ Published: uses the date published.

€ View count: uses the number of times articles have been

viewed during the period specified in the Number of days

used when summing article views property.

€ Alphabetically: uses the first letter of the article title (Shortdescription field).

Knowledge Base section sort direction.

(glide.knowman.section_sort_direction )

Select the order, ascending or descending, in which articles are

listed within each topic section on the knowledge portal. The

value used for sorting is set in the Knowledge section sort field

property.

Show unpublished articles in Knowledge Base portal and topic lists.

(glide.knowman.show_unpublished )

Select the Yes check box to allow users to see unpublished

articles in the knowledge portal and knowledge search results.

Use the subsequent List of roles... properties to designated which

users can see articles in various unpublished states. If this is not

selected, users with appropriate roles can access unpublished

articles through other modules of the Knowledge Base

application.

List of roles (comma separated) that can see articles in the Review workflow

state in the Knowledge portal and Topic list.

(glide.knowman.section.view_roles.review )

Enter role names exactly as they appear in User Administration

> Roles. If Show unpublished articles in Knowledge Base

portal and topic lists is selected, users with these roles see

articles in the Review workflow state in the knowledge portal, in

the topic list that appears when they click a topic title on the

portal, and in knowledge search results.

List of roles (comma separated) that can see articles in the Draft workflow state

in the Knowledge portal and Topic list.

(glide.knowman.section.view_roles.draft )

Enter role names exactly as they appear in User Administration

> Roles. If Show unpublished articles in Knowledge Base

portal and topic lists is selected, users with these roles see

articles in the Draft workflow state in the knowledge portal, in

the topic list that appears when they click a topic title on theportal, and in knowledge search results.

Show only Knowledge topic titles on portal page (no article links).

(glide.knowman.home_titlesonly )

Select the Yes check box to omit all article titles from the

knowledge portal and show only the topic names. Users can click 

the topic title to see the list of related articles.

Number of days (integer, default 30) used when summing article views. Views

older than this are not considered when sorting articles based on view count. 0

means consider all views. (glide.knowman.view_age.days )

Enter a number of days to consider when calculating view count.

This is used only when the Knowledge section sort field

property is set to View count. Enter 0 to have ServiceNow

consider all views, regardless of date.

Preview article when hovering over icon in portal.

(glide.knowman.show_preview_popup )

Select the Yes check box to have ServiceNow display article

number, date published, last date modified, and user comments

when a user points to the article icon.

Automatically place cursor in Knowledge portal search box.

(glide.knowman.portal_search_focus )

Select the Yes check box to have ServiceNow place the cursor in

the search field when a user opens the knowledge portal. Clear

the check box to have users click in the search field before

entering a search term.

Page 116: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 116/196

Configuring Knowledge Properties 115

Article View Properties

Article view properties give administrators control over the meta data and rating options that appear with articles.

They also let administrators grant access to individual feedback options based on user role.

Property Description

Show affected products when viewing an article.

(glide.knowman.affected_products.display )

Select the Yes check box to have article view include a

list of products associated with the article content.

Products shown are defined in the Affected Products

related list of the article's Knowledge form.

Show tasks to which an article has been recently attached.

(glide.knowman.recent_tasks.display )

Select the Yes check box to have article view include a

list of tasks associated with the article. Knowledge

articles can be attached to a task by clicking the Attach to

Task button after searching from a form.

Number of attached tasks to display when viewing an article.

(glide.knowman.recent_tasks )

Specify the maximum number of tasks to list in article

view.

Show article rating section, which may optionally include yes/no rating, star rating, and

flagging options. (glide.knowman.show_rating_options )

Select the Yes check box to display the rating options for

users with specific roles. Clear this check box to omit the

rating section for all users, regardless of role.

The Feedback field is always displayed for all users.

List of roles (comma separated) that can see an article's rating section, which may

optionally include yes/no rating, star rating, and flagging option.

(glide.knowman.show_rating_options.roles )

Enter role names exactly as they appear in User

Administration > Roles. If Show article rating

section... is selected, users with the roles listed here see

the yes/no rating, star rating, and flagging options,

according to related property settings.

Be sure to include all roles that should be permitted to see

any of these rating options. Separate properties enable

you to identify specific roles for each option separately.

All roles in those properties must also be listed here.

Show the "Was this article helpful?" yes/no rating option.

(glide.knowman.show_yn_rating )

Select the Yes check box to display the "Was this article

helpful?" rating to users with roles set in the associated

property. This appears only if the Show article rating

section... property is selected.

List of roles (comma separated) that can see yes/no "Was this article helpful?" rating

option. (glide.knowman.show_yn_rating.roles )

Enter role names exactly as they appear in User

Administration > Roles. If both Show article rating

section... and Show the "Was this article helpful?"

properties are selected, users with the roles listed here see

the "Was this article helpful?" rating in article view.

All roles listed here must also be listed in the List of 

roles that can see an article's rating section..."property.

Show "Create Incident" link after a Knowledge article is rated not helpful.

(glide.knowman.create_incident_link.display )

Select the Yes check box to display the Create Incident

link after a user rates an article as not helpful.

URL used for the "Create Incident" link after rating a Knowledge article not helpful.

(glide.knowman.create_incident_link )

Enter the URL for the page where users can create an

incident only if the Show "Create Incident" link..."

property is selected.

To find the URL, open the appropriate page, then

right-click the header bar and choose Copy URL.

Highlight the URL that appears and use the browser's

copy and paste feature to place it into this property field.

Page 117: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 117/196

Configuring Knowledge Properties 116

Show five-star rating option. (glide.knowman.show_star_rating ) Select the Yes check box to display the five-star rating to

users with roles set in the associated property. This

appears only if the Show article rating section...

property is selected.

List of roles (comma separated) that can see five-star rating option.

(glide.knowman.show_star_rating.roles )

Enter role names exactly as they appear in User

Administration > Roles. If both Show article rating

section... and Show five-star rating option propertiesare selected, users with the roles listed here see the

five-star rating option in article view.

All roles listed here must also be listed in the List of 

roles that can see an article's rating section..."'

property.

Show "Flag Article" option to identify incomplete/inaccurate articles.

(glide.knowman.show_flag )

Select the Yes check box to display the flag article option

to users with roles set in the associated property. This

appears only if the Show article rating section...

property is selected.

List of roles (comma separated) that can flag incomplete/inaccurate articles.

(glide.knowman.show_flag.roles )

Enter role names exactly as they appear in User

Administration > Roles. If both Show article ratingsection... and Show "Flag Article" option properties are

selected, users with the roles listed here see the flag

article option in article view.

All roles listed here must also be listed in the List of 

roles that can see an article's rating section...'"

property.

Show "Link" URL in Knowledge articles. (glide.knowman.show_links ) Select the Yes check box to have article view include the

Permalink URL that links directly to the article. Users can

easily copy the URL and share it with others.

Show user comments on knowledge articles.

(glide.knowman.show_user_feedback )

Select an option for showing user comments When

article loads, When user clicks link to show comments,

or Never for users with roles set in the associated

property:

List of roles (comma separated) that can see user comments on an article.

(glide.knowman.show_user_feedback.roles )

Enter role names exactly as they appear in User

Administration > Roles. If the Show user comments on

knowledge articles property is selected, users with the

roles listed here see user comments in article view.

Maximum number of user comments displayed on a knowledge article.

(glide.knowman.feedback.display_threshold )

Set a maximum number of user comments to display.

Knowledge Search PropertiesKnowledge search properties give administrators control over the search options available to users and the

presentation of search results.

Page 118: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 118/196

Configuring Knowledge Properties 117

Property Description

Display advanced search options.

(glide.knowman.advanced_search_options )

Select an option for displaying advanced search options on

knowledge pages.

€ Collapse/expand advanced search: displays a link that

allows users to show or hide the advanced search options as

needed.€ Always hide advanced search: prevents users from

accessing the advanced search options.

€ Always display advanced search: shows the advanced

search options at all times.

Number of Knowledge search matches returned.

(glide.knowman.search.rowcount )

Set the maximum number of results to return after any search to

prevent performance problems that can occur with unregulated

searches.

Knowledge search result order. (glide.knowman.order.search ) Select the order for displaying search results:

€ Number of Views: orders search results based on the

Number of days used when summing article views

property.

€ Relevancy: orders search results based on content that is

similar to the search term.

€ Last Modified: orders search results based on modification

date.

Show "Refine results" section on Knowledge search results page.

(glide.knowman.show_refine_results )

Select the Yes check box to have the search results page include

the area that lets users filter the results by topics and categories.

Search method used when searching Knowledge from a task or directly in the

Knowledge Base... (glide.knowman.search.operator )

Select the search approach to use when the search term includes

multiple words.

€ OR query: returns articles that contain at least one word

from the search term.

€ AND then OR query: first searches for articles that include

all words in the search term (an AND query). If no matches

are found, an OR query is performed.

Other Knowledge Properties

Additional knowledge properties let administrators control general knowledge management features.

Property Description

When attaching an article to an incident, copy the content into this

field. (glide.knowman.attach.fields )

When a user searches knowledge from a task form (incident, problem, change

request, or other) and clicks the article's Attach to Task button, the system

copies the article number and content into the field specified here. For more

information, see Customizing the "Attach to Task" Button.

Knowledge Management logo to display if running out of the

Service-now.com frames.

(glide.knowman.frameless_logo )

Click the reference lookup tool ( ) and choose an image file to be displayed

on knowledge pages that are used outside of the ServiceNow application

frames. For example, the logo image selected here appears if you create a

Content Management System site that includes knowledge pages.

Use submission workflow.

(glide.knowman.submission.workflow )

Select the Yes check box to use the knowledge submission workflow instead of 

the standard knowledge workflow. If this option is selected, each time a user

creates knowledge from an incident or problem, the content is placed into a

submission record instead of a draft article. Transforming knowledge

submissions into articles follows a specific workflow.

Page 119: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 119/196

118

Domain 4

Defining Catalog Items

Overview

Catalog items are goods or services available to order from the service catalog. Administrators and users with the

catalog_admin role can define catalog items, including formatted descriptions, photos, and prices.

Defining Catalog Items

To define a catalog item:

1. Navigate to Service Catalog > Catalog Definition > Maintain Items.

2. Click New.

3. Enter the catalog item details (see table).

4. Click Submit.

5. Define variables for the item, if applicable.

Page 120: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 120/196

Defining Catalog Items 119

Field Description

Name Enter the item name to appear in the catalog.

Category Select a category for the item. Catalog searches only find items that are assigned to a category.

Workflow or

Execution Plan

Select either a workflow or an execution plan (formerly named delivery plan) to define how the item request is fulfilled. If 

you select a workflow, the Execution Plan field is hidden. Clear the Workflow field to select an execution plan.

Price Set a price for the item and select the currency from the choice list.

Recurring Price Set a price that occurs repeatedly at a regular interval. For example, a printer maintenance service could have a $100.00

monthly recurring price. For details, see Setting Recurring Price.

Recurring Price

Frequency

Select the time frame for recurrence only if the Recurring Price field has an entry. For example, Monthly or Annually.

Omit Price on Cart Select this check box to hide the item price in the cart and the catalog listing. See Hiding Prices in the Service Catalog.

Active Select this check box to make this item active (available to be ordered).

Icon Upload a 16x16 pixel image to appear as an icon beside the item name in the catalog. If no image is uploaded, the default icon

appears beside this item.

Preview Link Click Preview Item to preview (in a new window) how the current item definition would look in the catalog.

Short Description Enter text that appears on the service catalog homepage, search results, and the title bar of the order form.

Ordered Item Link Specify the record defining a link to more information, as shown on the ordered item screen. See Adding Ordered Item Links

for more details.

Description Enter a full description of the item. This description appears on the item page and when a user points to the item's icon in the

catalog.

Picture [Optional] Upload an image of the item.

 Fields that can be added by personalizing the form:

Template [Available for Record Producer items only] Select a template to populate the generated record with predefined values.

No quantity Select this check box to hide the quantity selector for the item. See Hiding the Shopping Cart and Catalog Item Quantity.

No cart Select this check box to hide the shopping cart for the item. See Hiding the Shopping Cart and Catalog Item Quantity.

Order Control the ordering of items in category lists.

Related Lists

Variables Define variables for the item to provide options for ordering the item. See Using Service Catalog Variables.

Variable Sets Link an existing variable set to the item to provide multiple options for ordering the item. See Service Catalog Variable Sets.

Approved By

Group

Add the groups that have to approve requests for this item. See Approval Rules.

Approved By Add the users who have to approve requests for this item. See Approval Rules.

Additional

Categories

Add any aditional categories associated with this item, besides the category selected on the form. See Assigning Multiple

Categories.

Page 121: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 121/196

Defining Catalog Items 120

Assigning Additional Categories

A catalog item may be available from more than one category. For example, a laptop carrying case may be available

from both Laptops and Cases and Accessories.

To assign an item to more than one category, enter one category in the Category field on the Catalog Item form and

the other categories in the Additional Categories related list.

Additional Categories

Setting Recurring Price

A catalog item can have a recurring

price, as well as an initial price. For

example, a subscription to a mobile

phone contract may cost $500.00, with

an $30.00 monthly recurring price. The

recurring price feature is available in the Calgary release.

The price and the recurring frequency are set on the catalog item record. After the price and frequency are set, the

recurring price appears in the catalog, catalog search results, the catalog page for the item, the shopping cart, and the

order summary screen.

If multiple items with the same recurring price frequency are placed in the same shopping cart, they are grouped

together. The grouping makes it easier to see how much items cost for each frequency (for example, weekly,

monthly, and annually). If the shopping cart contains items with and without recurring costs, they are grouped

separately.

Page 122: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 122/196

Defining Catalog Items 121

On a Request record, recurring prices are grouped by frequency and shown in the Recurring Prices related list. In

the example below, two items each have a monthly recurring cost of $100.00 and their prices are grouped as a single

record of $200.00 monthly. Another item with an annual recurring cost of $500.00 is listed as a separate record.

If a Request record contains multiple items with the same recurring frequency, click the arrow next to the

corresponding Recurring Prices record to view details. In the example below, two items (the mobile phone and the

sales laptop) each have a monthly recurring cost and are grouped together under the Monthly Recurring Prices

record, but listed separately when the Recurring Prices record is expanded. Only one item has an annual recurring

cost.

Page 123: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 123/196

Defining Catalog Items 122

Hiding the Shopping Cart and Catalog Item Quantity

To hide the shopping cart or quantity for a service catalog item:

1. Navigate to Service Catalog > Catalog Definition > Maintain Items.

2. Select the catalog item.

3. Personalize the form to add the No quantity and No cart fields.

4. Select the No quantity check box to hide the quantity selector for anyone ordering that item.

Alternatively, you can make the quantity selector visible to certain roles with the List of roles

(comma-separated) that can use the quantity selector in the shopping cart property

(glide.sc.allow.quantity ) on the Service Catalog Properties page.

5. Select the No cart check box to hide the shopping cart for the item.

Catalog item definition

Page 124: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 124/196

Defining Catalog Items 123

Visible quantity and

shopping cart

Hidden quantity and shopping cart

Defining Item Quantities

By default, the service catalog offers quantity choices from 1 to 5, allowing customers to select item quantities

within that range. This quantity selection applies automatically to all items, assuming these items do not have the

quantity selector hidden).To increase or reduce the quantities that a customer can select for catalog items:

1. Navigate to System Definition > Choice Lists.

2. Filter the list for records with Table set to sc_cart_item and the Element set to quantity. The existing quantity

choices appear.

3. Add quantity choices, modeling them after the existing ones.

Choice lists

For example, to increase the

quantity range from 1-6, add a

new "6" record.

To reduce the quantities available for

catalog items, delete the relevant

quantity records. For example, to

reduce the quantity range to 1-3, delete

the records for "4" and "5".

Adding Ordered Item Links

Catalog administrators can provide a link on the ordered item screen, linking to more information about an item.

After users order the item, they can click the link to receive details about the item. The URL text and link can be

defined once and reused across multiple items - for example, for standard ordering terms and conditions. Ordered

item links are available in the Calgary release.

Links are rendered with an added parameter providing the sys_id of the requested item. For example, if the link is

mylink.com, it is rendered as mylink.com?req_item=abcde12345. This can be useful for virtual provisioning

situations.

To create an ordered item link:

1. Navigate to Service Catalog > Catalog Definition > Ordered Item Links.

2. Click New.

3. Enter a Name for the ordered item link.

4. Enter Link text to display as the link. For example, Click here to see more information about the iPhone.

5. Enter the exact Link URL. For example, http://www.mylink.com.

6. Click Submit.

Page 125: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 125/196

Defining Catalog Items 124

To add an ordered item link to an item:

1. Navigate to Service Catalog > Catalog Definition > Maintain Items.

2. Click an item Name.

3. In the Ordered Item Link field, click the reference lookup icon.

4. Click an ordered item link Name.

5. Click Update.

Editing Catalog Items from the Service Catalog

To edit a catalog item from the service catalog listing, right-click the header and select one of the following options:

€ Personalize Variables: add or remove variables from an item.

€ New Variable: create a new variable for the item.

€ Personalize Item: edit the item definition.

€ Personalize Client Scripts: edit the catalog client scripts for the item.

€ Personalize UI Policies: edit the catalog UI policies for the item.

Catalog item listing

Page 126: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 126/196

Record Producer 125

Record Producer

Overview

A record producer is a specific type of catalog item that allows end users to create task-based records (such as

incident records) from the service catalog. Record producers provide a simplified alternative to the regular

ServiceNow form interface for creating records.

Note: ServiceNow does not recommend creating Requested Item records from record producers. Requested Item records should only

be created using catalog items.

Defining a Record Producer

To define a record producer:

1. Navigate to Service Catalog > Catalog Definition > Record Producers.

2. Click New or select the record producer to edit.

3. Fill in the fields on the Record Producer form (see table).

4. Click Submit.

After you submit the form, ServiceNow adds the Variables and Variable Sets related lists.

5. Open the record again to define variables for the record producer.

Page 127: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 127/196

Record Producer 126

 Field Description

Name, Category, Order, Icon, Roles,

Active, Short description, Description, Picture

As for standard catalog items.

Table name Table in which the record producer creates records.

Template Static assignments for fields on the created record.

View CMS views in which the item is visible.

Preview Link Link that opens a preview of the item.

Script Scripts that should be run to dynamically assign values to specific fields on the created record.

Populating Record Data

To populate data with a record producer, use any combination of the following methods:

€ Create a variable on the record producer with the same name as the field in the target record. For example, a

variable named caller_id on a Create a New Incident record producer populates the caller_id field on the

new incident record.

€ Define a template to assign a static field value for all records created by the record producer.

€ Define a script that uses any variable or server-side objects and functions to assign values.

€ Use current.*FIELD_NAME* to reference fields on the record being created.

€ Use producer.*VARIABLE_NAME* to reference values entered by the end user.

Redirect After Submitting a Record Producer

To redirect an end user to a particular page after submitting a record producer, define the redirect link in the Script

field using  producer.redirect . For example, the following code redirects a user to their homepage after the record

producer is submitted:

 producer.redirect="home.do";

Page 128: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 128/196

Using Service Catalog Variables 127

Using Service Catalog Variables

Overview

Administrators and users with the catalog_admin role can create service catalog variables and add them to a service

catalog item, to provide options when ordering that item. The variables define questions to ask the customer ordering

the catalog item.

Creating Variables for Catalog Items

1. Navigate to Service Catalog > Maintain Items.

2. Select the desired catalog item.

3. In the Variables related list, click New.

4. Select the variable type - some additional fields may be displayed depending on the type, see Variable Types for

more information about extra fields.

Variable Definition

5. Fill in fields (see table).

6. If applicable, apply roles to control

who can create, read, or update the

information in the variable.

7. Click Submit.

Standard fields available are:

Field Description

Name A unique name for the variable

Order A number defining the order in which that variable appears.

Cat item The catalog item using the variable.

Include none An option to include or exclude None as a selection choice for the variable (available for some variable types only).

Question The question to display to the end user.

Show help [Optional] An option for providing additional information when the user requests it. See Defining Help Information for

information about setting up this additional information.

Default value The default value for the variable.

Active An option for making the variable active (available).

Mandatory An option for making the variable mandatory as part of the ordering process.

Global An option to show the variable in all catalog tasks within service catalog workflows or execution plans by default. The variable

must be attached to individual catalog tasks if this option is not selected.

Page 129: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 129/196

Using Service Catalog Variables 128

Visible on

Bundles

An option to display the variable on bundles.

Visible on

Guides

An option to display the variable on order guides.

Visible

Elsewhere

An option to display the variable on other types of catalog items (such as content items and record producers)

Defining Help Information

To include help information for a variable:

1. Select the Show help option.

Additional fields appear, to define the Help tag and Help text.

2. In the Help tag field, enter the short descriptive text that should appear between the question and the responses.

For example, Click here for help or More Information.

3. I n the Help text field, enter the expanded help text that appears when the user clicks the Help tag.

Page 130: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 130/196

Using Service Catalog Variables 129

Applying Roles

Apply role-based restrictions to a catalog variable to control which users can create, write (update), read, and delete a

value for the variable.

This example shows that, for the the CPU Speed variable used by the  Executive Desktop catalog item, only users

with the itil role can write (update) or create a value for that variable.

Note: You may need to personalize the variable form to add the Create / Read / Update / Write roles fields

To add role-based restrictions to a variable, click the lock icon by each field and select the roles that should have the

associated access to a value for the variable:

Page 131: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 131/196

Using Service Catalog Variables 130

Defining Question Choices

Some variable types present the user with a list of choices. For example, a multiple choice variable (such as What 

kind of email account do you want?) requires you to define the available choices (such as Exchange and UNIX ).

Question choice

To define question choices for a

variable:

1. Open the variable definition.

2. In the Question Choices related

list, click New.

3. Enter the question choice details

and save the record.

€ Price: and Recurring price:

variables may affect the item's

price and recurring price (if used).

€ Order: the number defining the order this appears when displayed.

€ Question: the actual question being asked for that variable.

€ Text: the choice presented to the user.

€ Value: the value stored in the database.

4. Repeat steps 2 - 3 for each available choice, to define the full set of choices for that variable.

Question choice

Page 132: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 132/196

Service Catalog Order Guides 131

Service Catalog Order Guides

Overview

An order guide gives customers an easy way to order multiple related items as a single request, It uses :

€ A single initial screen, where the customer fills in some initial information.

€ A set of selected catalog items based on conditions derived from the initial information.

For example, a New Employee Hire order guide contains items that new employees typically receive, from which the

customer selects appropriate items and options. If the new employee selects the optional business cards, that item is

then included as part of the request.

Creating Order Guides

To create an order guide:

1. Navigate to Service Catalog > Catalog Definition > Order Guides.

2. Click New.

3. Enter these order guide details and save the record.

€ Name: enter the guide name to appear in the catalog.

€ Order to cart: select the check box to allow users to continue shopping after completing the order guide.

When this check box is selected, users see the Add to Cart button instead of the Check Out button on the

order guide (you may need to personalize the form to add this field).

€ Two step: select the check box to enable two step ordering (rather than the default three step ordering).

€ Category: select the category heading under which the guide appears.

€ Short description: enter a summary of the order guide purpose.

€ Description: enter a description that appears on the first page of the order guide. Apply formatting by using

the HTML editor.

4. Define any cascading variables.

5. Define any rules for including items in the order guide.

Order guide definition

Enabling Two Step Order

Guides

By default, order guides present the

user with a three step process:

1. Describe Needs: the initial screen

2. Choose Options: filling in details

for the items ordered

3. Check Out: review and, if 

necessary, edit item information

before submitting the request

Order guides allow for an optional two

step mode that omits the Check Out

step. Upon completion of the Choose

Options step, the selected items are automatically ordered.

To set an order guide to use the two step checkout model, select the Two step check box in the Order guide form.

Page 133: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 133/196

Service Catalog Order Guides 132

Adding Cascading Variables

You can add cascading variables to an order guide, to be used by catalog items requested.

1. Open the order guide definition.

2. In the Variables related list, click New.

3. [Required] Enter a Name so this variable can be used in the rule base.

4. Enter the remaining variable details and save the record.

Order guide cascading variable

Note: These variables must have corresponding variables defined in the relevant catalog items. See Cascading Order GuideVariables for more information.

Creating Rules

The rule base lists all the rules that apply to the order guide. These rules determine the conditions under which items

are included in the order guide.

Rule base

To create rules for an order guide:

1. Open the order guide definition.

2. In the Rule base related list, click 

New.

3. Set these values:

€ One or more conditions that

must be true for this rule to

apply.

€ The item to include in the order guide if this rule is true.

€ The position within the order guide to place this item.

4. Click Submit.

Page 134: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 134/196

Service Catalog Order Guides 133

Setting rule conditions

Any question asked of the user in the order guide can be used as part of a condition.

For example, this rule states that if the new employee's job title is CEO or CFO or CTO or Director, and the

department is IT, then an executive desktop is included in their New Hire order.

Example 1

This rule states that if the new

employee selects the business_cards

check box, then business cards appear

in the order.

Example 2

Example of use

This example shows an order guide in

operation.

1. The system prompts the user for

information:

Order guide

2. The system uses the rule base to

generate options:

Page 135: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 135/196

Service Catalog Order Guides 134

Order guide

3. The user configures each item:

Order guide

4. The system takes the user to

checkout:

Page 136: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 136/196

Service Catalog Order Guides 135

Order guide

Defining a Service Catalog Workflow

Overview

Use the Graphical Workflow Editor to create service catalog workflows that drive catalog request fulfillment.

After creating a workflow, attach it to any catalog item in the Workflow reference field on the item form.

Creating a workflow involves:

€ Defining the new workflow fields.

€ Defining workflow activities.

€ Publishing the new workflow.

Page 137: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 137/196

Defining a Service Catalog Workflow 136

Defining a Service Catalog Workflow: Example

This section defines an example service catalog workflow to fulfill a laptop request.

See the standard workflow documentation for more information about defining workflows.

Stage 1: Create a New Workflow1. Navigate to Workflow > Workflow Editor.

2. Select New.

3. Fill in the New Workflow form (see the table for field descriptions).

4. Click Submit.

ServiceNow displays a graphical representation of the new workflow that shows an Activities pane on the

right.

Page 138: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 138/196

Defining a Service Catalog Workflow 137

 Field Input Value

Name  Laptop Fulfillment 

Table  Requested Item [sc_req_item] Please keep the following information in mind:

€ Workflows on the Service Catalog Requested Item [sc_req_item] table should fulfill the request of a single catalog item. Each

requested item can trigger its own fulfillment workflow, which runs when those specific items are ordered. We recommend you

use this table for workflows for requested items.

Note: To enable approval-type workflows to operate smoothly, make sure that the appropriate users have the correct role,

and that the role grants access to the necessary tables for users in all the relevant departments and domains.

€ Workflows on the Request [sc_request] table always run when a service catalog request is made, regardless of what item was

ordered. These workflows usually control the entire request process, which may involve delivering several parts (the request

items). So Request table workflows are not usually assigned to a specific item from the maintain item form. If you do use the

Request table for service catalog requests, you should add conditions to the workflow to make sure it only runs when the correct

item is requested.

Run after bus.

rules run

Select this check box. This is required to assure that a workflow with approvals runs properly. If this field does not appear, it must

be added. To personalize this form, submit it, then navigate to Workflow > Workflow Versions, select one of the workflows, and

personalize the form as normal.

Expected

time

Days 7 Hours 00:00:00. Because workflows cannot calculate the end time (not all of the activities within the workflow have defined

times), the Expected time on the workflow becomes the Delivery Time on the catalog request.

Schedule 8-5 weekdays. See Using Schedules for more information.

Timezone US/Pacific. The timezone that the schedule applies to.

Description  A workflow for the fulfillment of laptop requests.

Stage 2: Add Activities

1. In the Activities pane, expand Approvals and drag the activity Approval - User onto the arrow between Begin

and End.

This activity generates an approval from the manager of the person requesting the laptop.

2. Fill in the form that appears with:

€ Name:  Manager's Approval

€ Stage: Waiting for Approval

€ User: Click the lock icon ( ), and then click the variable picker icon ( ). Select Request > Requested

For > Manager.

3. Click Submit.

4. Expand Utilities in the Activities pane and drag the activity Set Values to the space below the approval.

5. Drag from the yellow box beside Rejected on the Approval - User activity to the new Set Values activity.

6. Drag again from the yellow box beside Always on the Set Values activity to End.

Page 139: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 139/196

Defining a Service Catalog Workflow 138

This activity marks the request as rejected if the manager rejects the request and then ends the workflow.

7. Fill in the form that appears with:

€ Name:  Rejected 

€ Stage: Completed 

€ Set These Values:  Approval and Rejected 

8. Drag the activity Set Values onto the the arrow between Approval - User and End, and the fill in the form.

This activity marks the request as approved if a manager approves it.

€ Name:  Approved 

€ Stage:  Fulfillment 

€ Set These Values:  Approval and Approved 

9. Drag the activity Create Task onto the arrow between Approved and End, and then fill in the form.

This task tells Procurement to procure a laptop for the user.

€ Name:  Laptop Procurement 

€ Stage:  Fulfillment 

€ Task type: Catalog Task [sc_task]

€ Priority: 3 - Moderate

€ Fulfillment group:  Procurement 

€ Short description:  Procure a Laptop

10. Drag the activity Notification onto the arrow between Laptop Procurement and End, and then fill in the form.

This task informs the requester that their laptop has been procured.

€ Name:  Procurement 

€ Stage:  Fulfillment 

Page 140: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 140/196

Defining a Service Catalog Workflow 139

€ To: Click the lock icon ( ), and then click the variable picker icon ( ). Select Request > Requested For.

€ Subject: Your laptop has been procured.

11. Drag the activity Create Task onto the arrow between Procurement and End, and then fill in the form.

This task tells Hardware to configure the laptop and prepare it for use.

€ Name: Set Up Laptop

€ Stage:  Fulfillment € Task Type: Catalog Task 

€ Priority: 3 - Moderate

€ Fulfillment Group:  Hardware

€ Short Description: Set Up Laptop

12. Drag the activity Create Task onto the arrow between Set Up Laptop and End, and then fill in the form.

This task tells the requester to come pick up the laptop.

€ Name:  Pick Up Laptop

€ Stage:  Delivery

€ Task Type: Catalog Task 

€ Priority: 3 - Moderate

€ Assigned to: Leave this field blank. The Advanced script assigns this task to the user who requested the item.

€ Short Description:  Pick Up Laptop

€ Advanced: Select the check box and set the Advanced Script value to:

task.assigned_to=${current.requested_for};

13. Drag the activity Log Message onto the arrow between Pick Up Laptop and End, and then fill in the form.

This leaves a message in the log to record the successful completion of the workflow.

€ Name:  Delivered 

€ Stage: Completed 

€ Message: The laptop delivery workflow is complete.

See Approval and Rollback Activities for more information about activities.

Page 141: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 141/196

Defining a Service Catalog Workflow 140

Stage 3: Publish the Workflow

Open the Workflow Actions menu ( ) and select Publish to publish the workflow.

The resulting workflow should look like this:

Page 142: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 142/196

141

Domain 5

System Update Sets

Overview

An update set is a group of customizations that can be moved from one instance to another. This feature allows

administrators to group a series of changes into a named set and then move them as a unit to other systems. In most

cases, update sets allow customizations to be developed in a development instance, moved to a test instance, and

then applied to a production instance.

Before using the System Update Sets application, review the Getting Started with Update Sets guide.

Enhancements

Calgary

The following enhancements have been added as of the Calgary release:

€ You can now change the Active field on a tracked table and still receive subsequent upgrades to the rest of the

record.

€ A new dictionary attribute (update_exempt) allows you to specify additional fields that you can change

without skipping subsequent updates to the rest of the record. See Excluding Fields from Updates.

€ A new field (replace_on_upgrade) in the Customer Updates [sys_update_xml] table determines whether a recordwith customer changes should be upgraded to the next software version. This field works with the new

update_exempt dictionary attribute, which allows you to exclude fields from updates.

€ Update records are modified to include application file records. This feature allows update sets to track and

transfer the customized record and its file record in a single update record. Preview and compare do not detect

differences in application files, and application file records on the target system are automatically overwritten

when you commit an update set.

€ You can navigate between a customer update record and the customized object or the application file for the

object.

€ When you preview a remote update set, the message now indicates whether errors or warnings are detected.

€ If any changes are marked as Skip, a confirmation message appears when you commit the update set.€ Update sets preview now indicates an error if a type mismatch is detected between a column on the target instance

and in the update set.

€ Changes that will result in data loss are automatically skipped when you commit an update set. A warning is

added in the update log when a change is skipped.

Page 143: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 143/196

System Update Sets 142

Aspen

The following enhancements have been added as of the Aspen release:

€ You can now compare versions and revert changes to objects on a table with the update_synch attribute

(such as business rules). See Comparing Versions. The Versions [sys_update_version] table has been added to

support this feature.

€ The preview function now detects a Problem if an updated object does not exist on the local system or in the

current update set. See Resolving Problems. The Update Problems [sys_update_preview_problem] table has been

added to support this feature.

€ The BaseLine update set has been removed.

€ A new access control rule restricts the ability to delete update sets.

€ A warning message now appears when a Customer Update (sys_update_xml) entry is deleted.

€ Customer updates (sys_update_xml records) with no Update Set value are no longer ignored during an upgrade.

€ Reports are available for tracking customer updates. See Reporting on Updates.

€ A UI Policy has been added to make sys_m2m (many-to-many) fields mandatory.

Developing Customizations with Update Sets

A common process for developing customizations with update sets is:

1. Create an update set on the development instance.

2. Make customizations and changes on the development instance.

3. Mark the update set as Complete.

4. Log in to the test instance and retrieve the completed update set from the development instance.

5. Commit the update set on the test instance, and test customizations thoroughly.

6. If the update set has problems in the test instance, repeat steps 1 - 6 to develop the fix on the development

instance with another update set.

7. Log in to the production instance and retrieve the completed update set from the development instance. If the

update set required a fix, retrieve both update sets.

8. Commit the update set on production. If the update set required a fix, commit both update sets in the order they

were made.

To learn more, see Using Update Sets.

Understanding Update Sets

Each update set is stored in the Update Set [sys_update_set] table, and the customizations that are associated with the

update set (entries in the Customer Update [sys_update_xml] table) appear as a related list on the update set record.When a tracked object is customized, a corresponding record is added in the Customer Updates [sys_update_xml]

table and is associated with the user's current update set. The associated file record is tracked and transfered along

with the customized object in a single update record (Calgary release). A corresponding record is also added to the

Versions [sys_update_version] table (Aspen release).

€ Administrators can compare two versions and revert to a specific version of an object.

€ Administrators can suppress versions for specific tables.

€ Administrators can specify fields on tracked tables that you can change without skipping updates to the rest of the

record.

Page 144: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 144/196

System Update Sets 143

Note:  Do not directly modify Customer Updates [sys_update_xml] records.

System-Maintained Update Sets

The Default update set provides system functionality and should not be changed, deleted, or moved between

systems. Use this update set to make changes to an instance without adding the changes to any user-created update

sets.

€ If a user does not have a current update set selected, changes are tracked in the Default update set.

€ If the Default update set is marked Complete, the system creates another update set named Default1 and uses it

as the default update set.

Determining Which Customizations are Tracked

Update sets track customizations of only some objects using one of the following methods:

€ The update_synch attribute on the table

€ Special handlers for changes that require updates to multiple tables

€ Manual unloading for homepages

Update sets cannot be used to transfer other system changes or data. In general, update sets capture configuration

information but not task or process data. For example, update sets track service catalog item definitions and related

configuration data like variables and variable choices. However, if you test the service catalog by placing orders, the

orders (requests, items, catalog tasks) are not tracked by update sets.

The update_synch AttributeTo see a list of tables on which customizations are tracked, navigate to System Definition > Dictionary and filter on

attributes CONTAINS update_synch.

A default rule blocks the use of the update_synch attribute on a table for which it is not predefined to avoid the

following issues:

€ Some core tables require special update handling because they represent information on multiple tables. When the

update_synch attribute is added to these tables, duplicate update records are created, causing major conflicts

that are difficult to troubleshoot and repair.

€ Using the update_synch attribute to migrate data records between instances can cause performance issues, as

it is not intended for this purpose. To migrate data, use an instance-to-instance import.

Warning: Do not add the update_synch attribute to a dictionary record. When improperly used, this attribute can cause major

performance issues or cause the instance to become unavailable.

Page 145: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 145/196

System Update Sets 144

Special Handlers

Some changes require special handlers because they represent information on multiple tables. These changes are

packaged into one update set entry so that all records are properly updated when the customization is committed. The

following changes are tracked with special handlers:

€ Workflows

€ Form sections

€ Lists

€ Related lists

€ Choice lists

€ Content pages (in Content Management)

€ Database changes

€ System dictionary entries

€ Field labels

Using Homepages with Update SetsHomepages are not added to update sets by default. To add a homepage to the current update set:

1. Navigate to Homepage Admin > Pages.

2. Right-click a homepage record.

3. Select Unload Portal Page.

Add the homepage to the current update set

Excluding Fields from Updates

Administrators can specify fields on tracked tables that you can change

without skipping updates to the rest of the record. This feature applies

to changes you make after the Calgary release. During subsequent

software upgrades, the value of the excluded field is preserved, while

the rest of the record receives updates. For example, you may want to

select the Client callable check box for a script include, but still

receive upgrades to the script.

To exclude a field from updates, add the dictionary attribute:

update_exempt

Note:

€ Values for excluded fields are not retained when you revert customizations to a default software version. For example, you

activate a UI macro and change the XML script. Later, a software upgrade contains a feature for the macro that you would like to

implement, so you revert your customizations. The default version replaces the entire customized version, and you now need to

reactivate the macro.

€ If you also change a field that is not update_exempt, then updates are skipped for the entire record (the entire customization is

preserved during upgrades).

Page 146: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 146/196

System Update Sets 145

Tracking the Active Field

By default, the Active field on a tracked table is treated as update_exempt even if the attribute is not present

(Calgary release). To specify that changing the Active field preserves the entire record (it is not excluded), add the

following attribute to the Active field on the table:

update_exempt=false

Overwriting Customizations During Upgrades

When you change any non-excluded fields on a record, a corresponding record is added in the Customer Updates

[sys_update_xml] table and the replace_on_upgrade field is set to false (Calgary release). To prevent

customizations from being overwritten by system upgrades, the upgrade process automatically skips changes to these

objects.

You may want to overwrite your customizations with the next software version. For example, you may change a

script to implement a temporary workaround for a problem that is fixed in the next version. You would want to

overwrite your workaround with the default version to ensure that you receive any future enhancements to the script.

1. Enter sys_update_xml.list in the navigation filter.

2. Open the most recent update record for the customized object. For example, to find the update record for the

 ArrayUtil script include, filter by Target name is ArrayUtil and find the most recently created record.

3. Personalize the form to add the Replace on upgrade field, if necessary.

4. Select the Replace on upgrade check box and click Update.

Application and Modules

System Update Sets application

The following modules are included in the System Update Sets application:

€ Update Source: defines the instances from which to retrieve update sets. SeeTransferring Update Sets.

€ Retrieved Update Sets: lists the update sets that have been retrieved from update

sources.

€ Update Log: shows the history of committing update sets.

€ Local Update Sets: lists the update sets created on the instance. See Creating

Update Sets.

€ Merge Update Sets: provides the ability to merge update sets.

€ Enable Update Set Picker: enables the Update Set picker in the navigation header.

€ Disable Update Set Picker: disables the Update Set picker.

Granting Access to the Update Set Picker

Use the Update Set picker to select the update set in which you track customizations.

Page 147: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 147/196

Page 148: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 148/196

Page 149: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 149/196

Getting Started with Update Sets 148

Avoiding Common Pitfalls

In addition to planning the process, make sure to avoid common pitfalls:

1. Do not delete update sets.

If an update set is deleted, any updated records may be overwritten in the next update.

2. Do not include the system_id field from the ldap_server_config record in an update set.An update set from a working configuration points to the wrong system_id node for the target instance and

does not work.

3. Do not back out the Default update set. This action causes damage to the system.

4. Never change the update set field value (update_set ) in a Customer Update record (sys_update_xml).

If a customization is made in the wrong update set, take the following action:

1. Switch to the desired update set.

2. Modify the object (record) that was originally changed. You can make a trivial change, such as personalizing a

field.

3. Save the record.

4. Back out the change just performed, and then save the record again.

This action ensures that the latest version of the object is included in the desired update set and prevents

duplicate updates for the same object in a single update set.

5. Do not mark an update set as Complete until it is ready to migrate.

Once an update set is complete, do not change it back to In progress. Instead, create another update set for the

rest of the changes, and make sure to commit them together in the order that they were created. Naming

conventions may help in this case (for example, Performance Enhancements and Performance

Enhancements 2).

6. Do not manually merge updates into an update set.

Always use the Merge Update Sets module. This tool compares duplicate files between update sets andselects the newest version. Only update sets that are In progress can be merged.

7. If a committed update set has a problem in the test instance, build the fix in another update set in the development

instance. Commit this set to the test instance, and then make sure both sets are migrated to the production instance

and committed in the order they were made.

8. Always preview an update set before committing it.

9. Set completed update sets on the production instance to ignore.

This state ensures the update set is not reapplied when cloning the instance.

10. Keep a to-do list of manual changes and data loads that need to be completed after an update set is applied.

11. Do not allow your update set to grow too large.

Limit update sets to 750 entries or less per update set.

12. Do not make too many changes at one time.

Verify that the correct changes have been made incrementally.

Page 150: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 150/196

Using Update Sets 149

Using Update Sets

Overview

An update set is a group of customizations that can be moved from one instance to another. For example, a set of 

enhancements to incident management can be grouped in an update set called Incident Management 2.0. While

Incident Management 2.0 is marked as the current update set, all changes are tracked in it. Once the update set is

marked as complete, it is ready to be moved to a test or production instance.

Each update set is stored in the Update Set [sys_update_set] table, and the customizations that are associated with the

update set (stored in the Customer Update [sys_update_xml] table) appear as a related list on the update set record.

The general process for using update sets is:

1. Review the Getting Started with Update Sets page to learn how to plan the update process and avoid common

pitfalls.

2. Use update sets to make customizations on a development instance.

€ Create an update set.

€ Perform customizations.

€ If necessary, report on updates.

€ If necessary, merge update sets.

€ Compare local sets to ensure the desired changes are ready to move.

3. Mark the update set as Complete.

4. Transfer the update set to another instance according to your test process. See Transferring Update Sets.

Creating Update Sets

To create a new update set:

1. Navigate to System Update Sets > Local Update Sets and click New.

2. Enter update set details (see table).

3. Click Submit.

Update set record

 Field Description

Name Enter a unique name for the update set. You can use naming conventions to organize update sets. For example, add the problem

number to the name of the update that fixes it, or use sequence numbers to keep track of the order in which update sets need to be

committed. To learn more, see Getting Started with Update Sets.

State Select In Progress for a new update set.

In Progress update sets can track customizations and can be selected from the Update Set Picker. Completed update sets can be

transferred from one instance to another.

Select Completed only when you are certain that the update set is complete. Once it is marked Completed, do not set it back to In

Progress. Instead, create a new update set with further customizations, and make sure to commit the update sets in the order that they

were marked Completed.

Select Ignore when you are no longer working on an update set but do not want it to be transferred to another instance. You shouldalways set Completed update sets on the production instance to Ignore. This state ensures the update set is not committed again

when cloning the instance.

Page 151: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 151/196

Using Update Sets 150

Created By Automatically populates your user name when you submit a new update set record.

Created Automatically populates the timestamp when you submit a new update set record.

Release Date Enter the date on which you plan to release the update set.

My Current

Set

Select the check box to add your customizations to this update set. This field does not apply to all users; it only applies to the user

who selects it.

The Update Set Picker is a better method for choosing a current set because it appears at the top of the page and allows for easy

switching between In Progress update sets.

Description Enter a description of the update set.

Performing Customizations with Update Sets

To add changes to update sets:

1. Select the desired update set from the Update Set Picker. Any customizations you make are now added to this

update set.

Update Set Picker

2. Perform a customization on a tracked table.

Comparing Versions

You can compare versions of any object for which changes are tracked,

such as a form, list, or business rule. This feature is available with the

Aspen release. Administrators can suppress versions for specific tables.

To compare versions of an object:

1. Use one of the following methods to view a list of versions for an object.

€ For forms or lists, right-click the header and select Personalize > Form Layout or Personalize > List

Layout. Under Related Links click Show Versions.

€ For tables that use the update_synch attribute (such as business rules), add the Versions related list to the form.

2. Select the check boxes next to the two versions to compare.

Select the versions to compare

3. In the Actions on selected rows list, select Compare. A

comparison appears. Deletions are highlighted in red, additions in

green, and modifications in yellow.

Compare two versions

Note: Click Revert to this Version to revert to the older version of the object. This option is available only when changes can be

reverted (see Reverting Changes).

Page 152: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 152/196

Using Update Sets 151

Reverting Changes

You can revert changes, if needed. This feature is available with the Aspen release.

To revert changes:

1. View a list of versions for an object (see Comparing Versions).

2. Right-click a version and select Revert to this version.

3. Click OK to confirm the action.

The selected version becomes the current version.

Note:

€ You can compare versions before reverting a change.

€ You cannot revert database changes.

€ You can revert to the most recent out-of-box version. You cannot revert to an older out-of-box version.

Viewing Changes in an Update Set

To see which customizations are associated with an update set:

1. Navigate to System Update Sets > Local Update Sets.

2. Select the update set name.

3. View the Customer Updates related list.

You can compare any update to the current version. Right-click the update record and select Compare to

Current.

Update set with changes to the incident list

layout and and the mark_closed business rule

Navigating Updated Records

You can navigate between a customer update record and the

customized object or the application file for the object (Calgary

release).

Navigate from an update record to:

€ The customized object, such as the application menu record, by

clicking the Show Related Record related link.

€ The application file record for the object by clicking the Show Application File related link.

Page 153: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 153/196

Using Update Sets 152

Show Related Record

Navigate from a customized object or

an application file to the current

customer update record by

right-clicking the form header and

selecting Show Latest Update.

Show Latest Update

Reporting on Updates

Run a report to view the

customizations to an instance.

To view update set reports:

1. Navigate to Reports > View / Run

and locate the Customer Update

section.

2. Run any of the available reports or

create a new report. The following

reports are available with the Aspen

release.

€ Application Changes (Incident): displays all changes made to the incident table. Select a different table and

run the report again to view all changes to another application.

€ My Changes: displays all changes made by the current user, grouped by table name.

Merging Update Sets

You can merge multiple update sets into one for easy transfer.

To merge update sets:

1. Navigate to System Update Sets > Merge Update Sets.

2. Use the slushbucket to select the update sets to merge.

3. Enter a name for the new update set. Updates are added to this set when the original sets are merged.

4. Click Merge selected.

€ The new update set is created and changes from the original sets are moved to the new set. Only changes that

are not merged into the new set remain in the original sets.

Page 154: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 154/196

Using Update Sets 153

€ If the same object is updated in both sets (for example, both update sets modify the Incident form), only the

most recent change is moved to the merged update set. The other update remains in its original update set to

provide a record of the changes that were not moved. You may want to validate that the correct changes were

moved to the new set by viewing the update set.

€ After merging and validating, it is a good idea to delete or empty the original update sets to avoid committing

an older change by mistake. The system does not remove the updates that were not merged into the new set.

Merge update sets

Comparing Local Update Sets

System Update Sets Preview enables administrators to preview local

and remote (retrieved) update sets and compare these sets with one

another to resolve conflicting changes. Compare local update sets to

identify collisions and ensure that the proper changes are being

committed. Resolve all conflicts before moving an update set between

instances.

1. Navigate to System Update Sets > Local Update Sets.

2. Select the check boxes beside the update sets to compare.

3. In the Action choice list, select Compare Update Sets.

The progress screen appears as ServiceNow generates the collision report.

4. Click Go to the Collision Report when the report is complete.

The Update Set Collisions list appears, showing all the changes in the selected sets.

5. Inspect the list for collisions by locating duplicate Collision Numbers that show the same change in separate

update sets.

6. Resolve the collision by deleting the unwanted update record from one of the update sets.

a. Click the link in the Sys update column for the unwanted update (sys_ui_list_incident_null in our

example).

b. Click Delete.

Note: You must open the update record to delete the record. You cannot delete the update by selecting

the check box beside the entry in the Update Set Collisions list and using the Delete action. When you

delete the update record, the customization is not backed out of the instance. Only the record of thecustomization is deleted.

Page 155: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 155/196

Using Update Sets 154

7. Run the comparison again to make sure all the collisions have been resolved.

Understanding Collisions

A collision is an update that has a newer update locally.

Most updates are compared by name, except for table records that have a different "sys_id" on another system as part

of their name. This does not include table records in the base system or table records created in one system and

moved to another system, but only table records created separately in each system.

Some of these records may include:€ System Properties [sys_properties] table

€ Configuration Item tables

€ Knowledge Base tables

€ Report tables

€ Homepage Admin tables

€ Service Catalog tables: Category [sc_category] table and Catalog Items [sc_cat_item] table

€ System Policy tables: Email Notifications [sysevent_email_action] table and Assignment Rules

[sysrule_assignment] table

€ System Definition tables: Application Menus [sys_app_application] table, Business Rules [sys_script] table, and

Client Scripts [sys_script_client] table

Page 156: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 156/196

Using Update Sets 155

Completing Update Sets

When you have completed the customizations and compared local update sets to resolve conflicts, mark the update

set as Complete.

1. Open the update set record.

2. Change the State of the update set from In progress to Complete.

€ The update set is available for other instances to retrieve. See Transferring Update Sets.

€ No additional customizations are tracked in the update set.

Transferring Update Sets

Overview

An update set is a group of customizations that can be moved from one instance to another.

The general process for using update sets is:

1. Review the Getting Started with Update Sets page to learn how to plan the update process and avoid common

pitfalls.

2. Use update sets to make customizations on a development instance. See Using Update Sets.

3. Transfer the update set to another instance according to your test process.

€ Retrieve the update set.€ Preview the update set to resolve any conflicts.

€ Resolve any problems.

4. Commit the update set and test customizations.

5. If necessary, back out or delete the update set.

6. Repeat steps 3 € 5 as necessary to complete the test process and to commit the customizations to production.

Retrieving Update Sets

To retrieve a completed update set from another instance:

1. [Optional] If IP address access control is enabled on the source instance, set up the target instance as anexception.

2. Navigate to System Update Sets > Update Source and click New to define an update source. Populate the fields

as follows:

€ Name: enter a unique name that indicates which instance from which this update set source will pull update

sets.

€ Type: specify whether the source instance is a Development, Test, or UAT instance.

€ URL: specify the URL of the source instance.

Note: make sure the URL begins with https:// or http:// (whichever is appropriate for the connection) or the

synchronization may fail.

€ Username select the username for logging in to the source instance.

Page 157: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 157/196

Transferring Update Sets 156

€ Password: enter the password for the username specified. The user account specified must have the admin

role.

€ Short Description: enter any other relevant information about the data source.

3. Right-click the header bar and select Save.

4. Click Retrieve Completed Update Sets. This brings any update sets marked as Completed from the source

instance to the target instance.

5. Navigate to System Update Sets > Retrieved Update Sets.

The update sets from the source instance are now on this table.

Transferring with IP Access Control

If IP address access control is enabled on the source instance, complete the following steps before transferring an

update set:

1. Contact ServiceNow Technical Support to obtain the IP Address for the target instance.

2. On the source instance, navigate to System Security > IP Address Access Control.

3. Add the IP address from step one as an exception.

Transferring with Basic Authentication

If the source instance has basic authentication turned on for SOAP requests, you must use a valid UID and password

pair to pull update sets.

Transferring with an XML File

Update sets can also be unloaded as an XML file and then transferred to any instance. For more information, see

Saving Customizations in a Single XML File.

Previewing Remote Update Sets

System Update Sets Preview compares update sets retrieved from a remote instance to preview sets already saved on

the local instance. Conflicting changes are evaluated by relative age. Administrators must preview update sets and

resolve conflicting changes before committing the update sets.

To compare retrieved update sets:

1. Navigate to System Update Sets > Retrieved Update Sets.

2. Select an update set from the list.

3. Under Related Links click Preview Update Set.

Note: You must preview the update set before you can commit it .

Page 158: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 158/196

Transferring Update Sets 157

ServiceNow displays a preview of the selected update set and compares the changes with retrieved and local

update sets in the instance. If a change is shared by another update set, the change is marked with one of the

following Dispositions, depending on which change is the newest:

€ Update

€ Insert

€ Delete€ Collision/Update

€ Collision/Insert

€ Collision/Delete

A change appears as a collision in the update set you are viewing if the change is older than the same change

in another update set. Newer changes in the current update set are marked as updates. In the following

example, Incident Release 1 is the retrieved update set. The Update Set Preview shows a Collision/Update

between the change to the Change Request form sections in the Incident Release 1 update set and a newer

change in the Production Incident update set. Conversely, the change to the Change Request form layout in

the Incident Release 1 update set is newer than the same change in the local Production Incident update set

and is marked as an Update.

4. To view the conflicting updates, click the highlighted collision link in the Disposition column.

The two versions of the record are displayed with the differences marked by a color key. The change types are:

Modified, Added, or Removed.

Page 159: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 159/196

Transferring Update Sets 158

5. To resolve the collision, select either Commit or Skip from the list in the Proposed action field.

Remember that the perspective here is that of the retrieved (remote) update set, and this action either accepts

or rejects the change from the remote update set. The default proposed action for resolving a conflict is Skip.

6. Click Update to save the action.

7. Select each collision and determine the action to take, until all collisions have been resolved.

8. Preview the update set again and resolve any problems that are detected (available with the Aspen release).

9. Run the comparisons again to make sure the correct updates are being applied.

Resolving Problems

The preview function detects a problem if an updated object does not exist on the local system or if the object exists

in another update set that has not been applied. For example, an update modifies the form layout for a table that has

not been created in the local instance. Resolve all problems before committing an update set to an instance.

This feature is available with the Aspen release.

To resolve problems:

1. Preview the update set. Problems are noted in the Problem column of the Update Set Preview list, as follows:

€ Error: the object does not exist on the system. Note that this function compares the display name and not the

sys_id for groups. Alternately, a type mismatch is detected between a column on the target instance and in the

update set (Calgary release). For example, the target instance has a field called due_date of type date and the

retrieved set has the same field with a type string.

€ Warning: the object exists in another remote update set that has not been applied.

Problems detected in an update set

2. Open a preview entry for which a problem is detected.

3. View the Update Problems related list to see what objects are

missing or mismatched.

You may need to personalize the form to add the related list.

Page 160: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 160/196

Transferring Update Sets 159

Missing objects

4. Resolve the problem:

€ To resolve a missing object error, either create the object on the

instance or transfer and commit the update set that creates the

object.

€ To resolve a type mismatch error, change the field type on the

source instance and transfer the update set again. Or, if the typechange is intentional, change the proposed action for the update

to Commit. Note that changing the data type can result in data

loss.

€ To resolve a warning, either commit the other remote update set first or move the update to the other update

set.

5. Repeat steps 2 € 4 for each problem.

6. Preview the update set again to ensure that all problems are resolved.

Committing Update SetsWarning: Committing an update set can affect performance on an instance and should not be done during business hours.

When you have previewed the update set and resolved any conflicts or problems, commit the update set.

1. Navigate to System Update Sets > Retrieved Update Sets and select the update set from the list.

2. Click Commit Update Set.

3. If any updates have a proposed action of Skip, a confirmation message appears when you commit the update set

(Calgary release).

€ Click Cancel to return to the preview and reevaluate the change. None of the updates are applied.

€ Click OK to skip the change and continue committing the changes that are marked as Commit.

A progress screen appears and displays a completion message when the update set has been successfully

committed.

Page 161: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 161/196

Transferring Update Sets 160

4. [Recommended] Change the State of the update set to Ignore when you are no longer working on it but do not

want it to be transferred to another instance.You should always set completed update sets on the production instance to Ignore. This state ensures the

update set is not reapplied when cloning the instance.

5. [Recommended] Navigate to System Update Sets > Update log and look for warnings that contain unsafe edit

(Calgary release).

The system automatically skips any changes that will result in data loss, such as changing the type of a field

that contains data. You must manually make any of these changes, if necessary. Use caution when making

changes that affect production data.

Backing Out Update SetsYou can back out changes to existing records. Navigate to the update set record and click Back Out. Once the back 

out is complete, the update set is deleted. It is not recommended to back out an update set if other update sets have

been applied more recently.

Impact: Backing out update sets reverses all changes. Carefully review the contents of an update set before backing

it out to avoid causing issues. Do not back out the Default update set as you may damage the configuration of the

instance.

The Back Out button reverses both record-level updates and changes to the dictionary.

The following table illustrates the expected behavior of backing out an update set:

 Customer Update Back out action

A new table The table is dropped, deleting any data on it.

A new field The field is dropped from the database, deleting any data on it.

A deleted field The field is restored to the database, restoring any lost data.

A resized field The field resize is reversed. If the field has been increased, data is truncated first to avoid errors.

A personalized form The form is reverted to its previous state.

A record is inserted The record is deleted.

A record is deleted The record is restored with its original data.

The Back Out button is available only on the most recent update set.

Page 162: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 162/196

Transferring Update Sets 161

If backing out an update set as described above is not sufficient, another solution is to create and commit a new

update set to reverse the customizations.

Deleting Update Sets

To undo customizations, back out the update set.

Administrators can delete an update set only when it is empty (no sys_update_xml entries are associated with it) and

is not the current update set. For example, after merging update sets you may choose to delete the original sets. This

function is restricted by an access control rule (ACL) on the Update Set [sys_update_set] table (as of the Aspen

release).

Deleting update sets that contain sys_update_xml entries is restricted because:

€ It does not undo the updates.

€ It removes any record of who applied the customizations.

€ It removes the sys_update_xml entries associated with the update set, so customizations are overwritten when the

instance is upgraded.

Deleting Update Entries

Deleting sys_update_xml entries is not recommended because:

€ It removes the record of modifications to the instance.

€ Your customizations may be overwritten when the instance is upgraded.

When you try to delete an update entry, a warning message appears (available with the Aspen release). Click OK to

confirm the deletion.

Upgrades and the Release Cycle

Overview

The ServiceNow release cycle is designed to provide optimal stability and quality, with the flexibility to quickly

address problems and deliver new features. ServiceNow uses the concept of a family for a given feature set. A family

contains:

€ A feature releases, which contain new functionality and fixes to existing functionality.

€ Patch releases and hotfixes, which provide problem fixes and are released as needed.

Customers are notified prior to the start of an upgrade rollout period. Release notes are available for all releases.Customer customizations are typically preserved throughout all upgrades.

Page 163: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 163/196

Upgrades and the Release Cycle 162

Release Terminology

Release Type

ServiceNow uses the concept of a family for a given feature set. A family includes all versions, patches, and hotfixes

for a feature release. For example, Aspen Patch 1 Hotfix 2 is in the Aspen family.

This table defines the types of releases that may be available in a family.

 Type Scope Upgrade Policy

Feature

release€ Introduces new features.

1

€ Includes all available fixes to existing functionality.

€ Is production-oriented; quality and stability are of the highest

priority throughout the life cycle.

€ Applied automatically during the rollout period.

€ Customers receive advanced notification.

Patch

release

€ Supports existing functionality with a collection of problem fixes.

€ Includes all previously issued hotfixes for a given release.

€ Does not include new features.

€ Applied as needed on a per customer basis.

€ ServiceNow provides patches for the current and

previous two feature releases.

Hotfix € Supports existing functionality with a specific problem fix for a

feature release.

€ May not include any previous fixes for a given release.

€ Does not include new features.

€ Applied as needed on a per customer basis.

€ ServiceNow provides hotfixes for the current and

previous two feature releases.

1 A feature provides a complete solution that customers can implement to add value to their organization. New

 features are only available as part of a feature release. Features are supported with patches and hotfixes.

Release Availability

Customers can upgrade instances to current releases. Current releases may be in a state of general availability (GA)

or controlled availability (CA). The following table explains the differences between GA and CA.

All releases are supported with patches and hotfixes for the current release and two prior feature releases.

 Controlled Availability

(CA)

General Availability

(GA)

Recommended for use in production environments

Fully supported with patches and hotfixes for the current release and two prior feature

releases

Successfully completed quality review, testing, and validation

Customers receive at least 30 days notice before upgrade

Customers can waive 30 days notice to upgrade

Recommended for use by all customers

Recommended for early adopters of new features and fixes

Page 164: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 164/196

Upgrades and the Release Cycle 163

Release Cycle (Diagram)

The following diagram illustrates a hypothetical release cycle based on the types of releases that ServiceNow offers.

The example progresses as follows:

1. New features are released in Feature Release 1.

2. Hotfix 1 contains fixes for problems in Feature Release 1.

3. Hotfix 2 contains fixes for different problems in Feature Release 1.

4. Patch Release 1 contains the fixes in Hotfix 1 and Hotfix 2, plus additional fixes for Feature Release 1.

5. Hotfix 3 contains fixes for different problems in Feature Release 1.

6. Feature Release 2 contains the fixes in Hotfix 1, Hotfix 2, Hotfix 3, Patch Release 1, and additional fixes. It also

contains new features.

A hypothetical release cycle

Release Name & Upgrade Process

The Aspen release introduces a new naming convention based on an

alphabetical system (rather than seasons or months). For example, the

first release is Aspen. Hotfixes and patch releases are now the only

interim releases that are available. Previously, releases occurred three

times a year (called  February or Winter ,  June or Spring, and October 

or Fall) and interim releases (called Preview or Stable) were available.

ServiceNow introduces a new upgrade process as of the Aspen release. For the first time, early adopters have an

opportunity to install this release before it becomes generally available. Also, upgrades occur over a window of 

several weeks, rather than all at once. Customers receive notification before upgrades.

Customer Control over Upgrades

Upgrade Notification Schedule

Customers and partners are notified by email 30 days prior to the start of the rollout period for an upgrade. Release

documentation is available at the time of notification, but specific details may change prior to the upgrade.

Upgrades are rolled out in phases to all instances. Customers are not notified of the exact date or time that a specific

instance will be upgraded.

CustomizationsCustomer customizations are typically preserved by the upgrade process by the following mechanism.

€ When an object is customized, a corresponding record is added in the Customer Updates [sys_update_xml] table.

This table maintains the current version information for all objects that have been customized.

€ To prevent customizations from being overwritten or broken by system upgrades, the upgrade process

automatically skips changes to objects that have a current version in the Customer Updates table.

You may want to overwrite certain customizations when a software upgrade contains a feature that you would like to

implement. To revert a customized object to the system default version, see Reverting Customizations.

Page 165: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 165/196

Upgrades and the Release Cycle 164

Checking Your Release Version

System administrators can check which release is running on an instance:

1. Navigate to System Diagnostics > Stats.

2. Locate the Build name (Berlin release), Build date, and Build tag.

3. [Available with the Berlin release] Match the build name to the release name in the Release Notes.

4. Match the build date and tag to the build date and tag in the Release Notes.

View Stats or point to the header logo

Confirming an Upgrade

To confirm that a recent upgrade to a

feature release has been performed:

1. Navigate to System Logs > Events

and find the event

system.upgraded. This event can

trigger the System Upgraded

notification. If the event has a State

of error, the notification is not sent;

however, the upgrade may have

completed successfully.

2. Navigate to System Diagnostics > Upgrade Log and locate the message "Notifying HI that upgrade has been

completed."

Note: To confirm that a patch has been applied, find the system.patched event. You can create a notification for this event; it is not 

available by default.

Configuring a Completed Upgrade Notification

To configure an instance to send an email when an upgrade is successfully completed:

1. Navigate to System Policy > Notifications.

2. Open the System Upgraded notification.

3. Select an appropriate contact in the User field.

4. Click Update.

The selected user now receives a notification when an upgrade is successfully completed.

Page 166: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 166/196

Upgrades and the Release Cycle 165

System Upgraded notification

FAQ

Can I get only some of an

upgrade's features?No, but some features are released as

plugins that are not activated by

default. For more information about a

particular release, review release

documentation or preview features on

the demo instance[1]

. We appreciate

feedback and strive to ensure upgrades

go as smoothly as possible, with no "surprises" for the user community.

If our instance is more than one release behind, can we still upgrade directly?

Yes, ServiceNow fully supports the current and previous feature release as well as any interim hotfixes and patch

releases.

References

[1] https:/   /  servicenow. com/  demo

Page 167: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 167/196

166

Domain 6

Import SetsImport Sets

€ Importing Data Using Import Sets

€ Using the Coalesce Field

€ Importing from Another ServiceNow Instance

€ Data Sources

€ Adding JDBC Drivers for Data Sources not Supported in Out-of-Box Systems

€ SQL Server Integrated Authentication for Windows

€ Viewing the Import Log

€ Import Run History

€ Scheduling Data Imports

€ Web Proxy

€ Creating New Transform Maps

€ Transform Map Scripts

€ Import Set Scheduled Cleanup

€ Troubleshooting Import Set Performance

Overview

Import Sets is a powerful tool used to import data from various data sources, and then map that data into

ServiceNow tables. The Import Sets table acts as a staging area for records imported from a data source.

Note:  Data should not be imported in extremely large chunks. Creating an extremely large import set can cause delays and system

outages.

A transform map determines the relationships between fields displaying in an Import Set table and fields in an

existing ServiceNow table, such as the Incidents or Users table.

Importing sets will skip records when the data in the instance matches the data being imported.

Note:  Import Sets run as user System. Therefore, Import Sets cannot add data to encrypted fields.

Page 168: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 168/196

Import Sets 167

General Parameters

Flowchart of Import Set application operating parameters

€ Import sources:

€ Files:

€ Excel

€ XML€ CSV

€ Network (supported online data

retrieval methods):

€ HTTP

€ FTP

€ JDBC

€ Transformation Mapping:

€ Transformation is flexible to

your needs.

€ Specification can be as simple

as having the application

auto-match field names from source and destination.

€ Mapping can also use advanced logic utilizing the full power of the ServiceNow scripting environment.

€ A single import set field can also be mapped to multiple fields on a production table.

€ Import destinations:

€ Any table within ServiceNow is a potential destination for transformation of an import set.

€ Any field within a table can serve as a potential destination for transformation from a field within an import

set.

Page 169: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 169/196

Import Sets 168

System Import Sets

€ Load Data: Data source records are references imported data

or location to retrieve data from.

€ Create Transform Map: is used to specify how data uploaded

into an Import Set should be transfered onto production tables.

They allow for extremely detailed customization of import

operations.

€ Run Transform: Transform map scripts allow for

customization of import operations using a robust programming

interface that can be used to introduce advanced logic. Import

Sets Map scripting is fully integrated into the ServiceNow

scripting environment and can access the objects thereof.

AdministrationModules used for configuring data sources, transform maps and

setting up schedules for executing import sets.

Data Sources

Data Sources is a module of the Import Sets application. A data

source can be from a file or a JDBC connection. Files can be local

and uploaded from the browser or can be accessed by defining a remote data connection as the file retrieval method.

Data sources are used to create an import set so that data can be processed, if necessary, prior to being mapped onto a

production table. When using import sets to map data from one ServiceNow table to another, it is not necessary todefine a data source; this can be done simply by using the import set mapping tools. Importing sets will skip records

when the data in the instance matches the data being imported.

See Data Sources for more information.

Transform Maps

A transform map is a set of field maps that determines the relationships between fields in an import set and fields in

an existing ServiceNow table (such as Incidents or Users). Once defined, it is possible to reuse existing transform

maps for mapping data from an import set to a ServiceNow table.

The Transform Map module allows for defining destinations for imported data on any ServiceNow tables. Transformmapping can be as simple as dragging and dropping to specify linking between source fields on an import set table

and destination fields on any ServiceNow table. When using transform mapping, you can also dynamically map

source and destination fields by using ServiceNow scripting objects and functionality.

See Creating New Transform Maps for more information.

Page 170: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 170/196

Import Sets 169

Scheduled Imports

Scheduled Imports make it is possible to specify that certain import operations should occur at some regular interval.

If a remote data source is chosen, it will be refreshed via the remote connection prior to the import operation.

See Scheduling Data Imports for more information.

Advanced

€ Import Sets: Table of all import sets. An import set is a set of records imported from a data source that can be

mapped to an existing table and serves as a staging location for storing imported data.

€ Progress: Show the progress of scheduled import set jobs that are running in the background.

€ Transform History: Log of completed import operations (where an import set was transformed onto a

production).

€ Transform Errors: Log of all errors encountered during any import operations.

€ Import Log: Log of all Import Set application operations.

Import Set Tables€ Cleanup: Graphical tool used for deleting old data or removing no longer needed import set tables.

€ Scheduled Cleanup: Schedule regular deletion of import set data older than a set number of days. Only data is

removed, not the import table itself.

It is strongly recommended that you activate this job to ensure your import tables do not get extremely large.

Deleting records older than seven days should be sufficient.

€ Import Set Tables: Expandable list of previous import set will contain references to the most recent import set

records that have been uploaded from a data source.

Terminology DefinedImport Sets: ServiceNow table that acts as a staging location for records imported from some data source.

Transformation: in the context of ServiceNow, System Imports Sets, refers to the synchronization of data in an

import set table with data on a production table according to rules that are defined in an import set table.

Foreign record insert: A foreign record insert occurs when an import makes a change to a table that is not the target

table for that import. This happens when updating a reference field on a table, for example when updating the value

for caller on an incident the import is actually updating the sys_user table of ServiceNow.

Field Descriptions€ Number: Unique identifier for an Import Set

€ State: Gives the current status of the Import Set either loading, loaded or processed, where loading refers to an

Import Set still currently being imported from a data source, loaded to an Import Set fully uploaded from a data

source but not yet transformed onto a production table and processed to an Import Set fully uploaded and already

transformed onto a production table since the last refresh from the datasource.

€ Data source: The data source from which this Import Set is populated with data

€ Table name: The name of the Import Set

€ Created: Date the Import Set was created

€ Load Completed: Date and time the Import Set was last updated from the datasource

€ Load Runtime: Length of time for the last update from the datasource to complete

Page 171: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 171/196

Import Sets 170

This is an example of the Import Sets table list view.

This is an example of the Import Sets table form view. From here it

is possible to view information on the status of the last data

retrieval operation that was done for a certain Import Set.

Using the Coalesce Field

Import Sets

€ Importing Data Using Import Sets

€ Using the Coalesce Field

€ Importing from Another ServiceNow Instance

€ Data Sources

€ Adding JDBC Drivers for Data Sources not Supported in Out-of-Box Systems

€ SQL Server Integrated Authentication for Windows

€ Viewing the Import Log

€ Import Run History

€ Scheduling Data Imports

€ Web Proxy

€ Creating New Transform Maps

€ Transform Map Scripts

€ Import Set Scheduled Cleanup

€ Troubleshooting Import Set Performance

Overview

In an import, coalescing on a field (or set of fields) means the field will be used as a unique key. If a match is found

using the coalesce field, the existing record will be updated with the information being imported. If a match is not

found, then a new record will be inserted into the database.

Updates Only

To only update records where a match is found, and skip records where a match is not found, specify a coalesce field

and add the following script as an OnBefore script to the transform map.

Page 172: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 172/196

Using the Coalesce Field 171

if (action == 'insert')

ignore = true;

Data Sources

Import Sets

€ Importing Data Using Import Sets

€ Using the Coalesce Field

€ Importing from Another ServiceNow Instance

€ Data Sources

€ Adding JDBC Drivers for Data Sources not Supported in Out-of-Box Systems

€ SQL Server Integrated Authentication for Windows

€ Viewing the Import Log

€ Import Run History

€ Scheduling Data Imports

€ Web Proxy

€ Creating New Transform Maps

€ Transform Map Scripts

€ Import Set Scheduled Cleanup

€ Troubleshooting Import Set Performance

Overview

Data Sources is a module of the Import Sets application. Data sources are used to create an import set so that data

can be processed, if necessary, prior to being mapped onto a production table. The data source type describes the

origin of data:

€ File: Data is in a recognized file format, accessible locally or remotely through several file retrieval methods

€ JDBC: Data is in a database, accessible using JDBC. We currently support Oracle, MySQL, MS SQL Server,

Sybase and DB2 drivers.

€ LDAP: Data is in an LDAP server, accesible through the LDAP or LDAPS ports, 389 and 636 respectively.

Note: When using import sets to map data from one ServiceNow table to another, it is not necessary to define a data source, rather 

this can be done simply by using the import set mapping tools. Importing Sets will skip records when the data in the instance matches

the data being imported. For instructions on creating transform maps, see Creating New Transform Maps.

Page 173: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 173/196

Data Sources 172

File Types

You can import a file from a local source, a remote network server, or another instance by providing a path and

authentication information. For file type import sets, you can select from a list of different file retrieval methods,

including FTP, FTPS, SCP, and HTTPS.

|

When you select a data source of type File, the following fields are displayed:

 Field Description

Name Unique name of this data source.

Import set table

Label

A label is a tag on a piece of data. Labels are logical, descriptive names that are localizable.

Import set table name ServiceNow uses the label you entered to construct a unique table name. This prevents namespace collision with an already

existing table.

Type Select File from the drop-down list.

Format Select one of the following formats from the list: CSV, CSV (tab), Excel, XML.

Zipped Select this check box if the import file is compressed.

Xpath for each row XPath expression which selects the nodes which are to become rows in the import table. The children of the selected nodes

will become the columns in the rows.

Expand node

children

if an element which is to become a column contains further child elements, should these be converted into additional

columns, or should the column value be an XML fragment?

File retrieval method Choose the appropriate retrieval method for this file. See File Retrieval Methods for details.

File path Path to the import file

SCP authenticationmethod

Select to authenticate with a Username and Password or with a Public key.Note

: You cannot authenticate to data sourceswith a public-private key pair. Use username/password authentication instead.

Server Type the name of the server from which the file will be imported.

User name Type the user name for authentication on the file server.

Password Type the password for authentication on the file server.

Private keyfile Note: This is a legacy field for SCP authentication with a public-private key pair. You cannot authenticate to data sources

with a public-private key pair. Use username/password authentication instead.

Currently ServiceNow supports file imports in XML, CSV (character-separated values) and Excel (XLS) formats.

Page 174: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 174/196

Data Sources 173

Example XLS data source file

XLS refers to the Microsoft Excel file format. This is the default format for spreadsheets created in Excel for

versions 2003 and older. The new XLSX file format that is the default format for Excel 2007 is not currently

supported. If importing a list from Excel 2007 then it is necessary to use the "save as" feature and specify XLS

format (versus XLSX).

Note:  All .xls files must use the 1900 date system as opposed to the 1904 date system as the latter will cause your dates to be

imported with a year that is 4 years earlier than what your spreadsheet displays. Refer to MS Support for additional information

about date systems.

Example XML data source file

XML data source definitions have an additional field to specify the "XPath for each row". This is an XPath[1]

expression to select the elements whose children will be converted to rows in the import set table. Each selected

element will cause a row to be created in the import set table. The children of the selected element will be convertedinto columns in the row. For example, to import the asset information from the sample XML file below, the XPath

expression should be specified as "/export/asset". This expression matches the 3 <asset> elements in the file, so 3

rows will be created. Although one could also specify "//asset" this expression is much less efficient for large files. It

is strongly recommended that you use the absolute location path form for XPath expressions when using the XML

loader. In other words, avoid expressions containing "//" unless strictly necessary.

Be careful not to specify an insufficiently restrictive XPath expression with a large XML file. For example, the

expression "/export" would be wrong for the sample file below, since it matches the document (root) element. In

general, you should never specify an XPath expression which matches the root element unless you want everything

in the document to be made into a single row. Specifying an insufficiently restrictive XPath expression when

attempting to load large XML files could result in lengthy processing times and incorrect output. For this reason, it is

best to test and debug XML data source specifications with small XML files containing only a few rows worth of 

Page 175: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 175/196

Data Sources 174

data. Once the specification has been tested, you can run it again with the full file.

Notice that the <userInfo> elements contained within <asset> contain child elements. This will cause a column

called "userInfo" to be created containing XML for the userInfo element. If Expand child nodes is checked,

individual columns will also be created for userInfo/lastName and userInfo/firstName. If Expand child nodes is not

checked, only the userInfo XML column will be created.

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>

<export>

  <asset>

  <assetTag>AT-01939</assetTag>

  <type>Desktop</type>

  <os>Windows 7 Professional</os>

  <lastlogondate>12-07-2010 12:31:24</lastlogondate>

  <userInfo>

  <lastName>Loo</lastName>

  <firstName>David</firstName>

  </userInfo>

  <isenabled>true</isenabled>

  </asset>

  <asset>

  <assetTag>AT-53480</assetTag>

  <type>Desktop</type>

  <os>Windows 7 Professional</os>

  <lastlogondate>09-07-2010 13:25:53</lastlogondate>

  <userInfo>

  <lastName>Merritt</lastName>

  <firstName>Norris</firstName>

  </userInfo>

  <isenabled>true</isenabled>

  </asset>

  <asset>

  <assetTag>AT-55782</assetTag>

  <type>Desktop</type>

  <os>Unknown</os>

  <lastlogondate>01-01-1900 00:00:00</lastlogondate>

  <userInfo>

  <lastName>Currie</lastName>

  <firstName>Mike</firstName>

  </userInfo> 

<isenabled>true</isenabled>

  </asset>

</export>

Page 176: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 176/196

Data Sources 175

Example CSV data source file

CSV, character-separated value files are used as a cross-compatible file format for transferring files across

platforms. A CSV file is a text file that define a grid, where columns are defined by commas and rows are defined by

line breaks. For the purpose of defining precise spacing for Importing strings quotes can be used as wrappers, but

they are not necessary.

"user_name","name","email","sys_created_on","active"

"jared.laethem","Jared Laethem","[email protected]","2008-02-24 22:21:32","true"

"jerrod.bennett","Jerrod Bennett","[email protected]","2007-08-12 12:12:18","true"

"eric.schroeder","Eric Schroeder","[email protected]","2007-07-03 11:50:20","true"

"rob.woodbyrne","Rob Woodbyrne","[email protected]","2007-07-03 11:49:57","true"

"admin","System Administrator","[email protected]","2007-07-03 11:48:47","true"

"christen.mitchell","Christen Mitchell","[email protected]","2007-05-16 15:26:42","true"

"rob.phillips","Rob Phillips","[email protected]","2007-01-22 11:25:34","true"

"davin.czukowski","Davin Czukowski","[email protected]","2006-07-11 14:01:26","true"

"luke.wilson","Luke Wilson","[email protected]","2006-02-07 15:29:48","true"

"bow.ruggeri","Bow Ruggeri","[email protected]","2005-07-07 11:39:58","true"

"don.goodliffe","Don Goodliffe","[email protected]","2005-05-02 12:28:40","true"

"david.loo","David Loo","[email protected]","2005-02-22 16:00:00","true"

"guest","Guest","[email protected]","2004-05-01 17:00:00","true"

"fred.luddy","Fred Luddy","[email protected]","2004-05-01 17:00:00","true"

To process CSV files that are delimited by any character other than a comma:

Note: This is an advanced step to create a CSV import. Normally, you would upload the data and import it directly using System

 Import Sets, which will create this CSV data source for you automatically.

1. Create the data source using one of the following methods:

€ Click New on the Data Source list.

€ Create the data source using the Attachment file retrieval method.

2. Attach the CSV file to this data source.

3. Personalize the Data Source form and add the CSV Delimiter field.

4. Type the character you want as the delimiter for the CSV file in this field.

For example, you might use the pipe symbol ( | ).

5. Test load the data source.

The CSV loader will parse the CSV file, expecting it to be delimited (separated) by "|".

Page 177: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 177/196

Data Sources 176

Encoding

The default character set used for decoding the imported CSV file is WINDOWS-1252. It may become necessary to

use a specific type of encoding such as utf-8 when importing a CSV document. This can be done within a data

source using the properties field. To use utf-8 encoding when importing a CSV file as an attachment:

1. If the 'Properties' field does not exist on your Data Source form, personalize the form and add it.

2. We add this property in the following format 'charset=<your encoding type>' (i.e. charset=utf-8).

Refer to the picture below to see what this data source would look like with this property added:

File Retrieval Methods

After defining the files that are compatible for importing, the next configuration step for the file data source is to

define how the file can be imported. The following file retrieval methods are available to copy the file from where it

resides to ServiceNow to be loaded into an import set.

Note:  For the import to succeed, your FTP server and client must be set up for the same authentication mechanism that you select 

here. Refer to the following article for an explanation of the protocols support [2]

Page 178: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 178/196

Data Sources 177

 Method Description

Attachment Attach a file to the record and import that file in an import set.

File Select a file to import from a local drive or a network location (this is unusual). Selecting this method provides a field to specify

the network path. The Aspen Release limits your selection to one of these file locations for increased security.

€ Tomcat home. For example, /Apache Tomcat.

€ Glide system home. For example, /<Tomcat home>/webapps/glide/itil/WEB-INF/ .

€ Temporary directory. For example,/tmp or /var/tmp depending on how your system is configured.

If you need to specify an arbitrary network path, consider using a different file retrieval protocol such as FTP or SCP where you

can secure the communications channel.

SFTPRetrieve a file using SFTP

[3]. Fields are provided for the server name and logon credentials.

FTPRetrieve a file from an FTP

[4]server in your network. Fields are provided for the server name and logon credentials.

FTPS (Auth

SSL)An FTP Secure

[5]authentication command issued through the Secure Socket Layer (SSL) protocol. This method is also known as

explicit FTP over SSL.

FTPS (Auth

TLS)

An FTP Secure[5]

authentication command issued through the Transport Layer Security (TLS) protocol. This method is also

known as explicit FTP over TLS.

FTPS (Implicit

SSL)In implicit security, the FTPS

[5]server defines a specific port for the client (990) to use for secure connections. Implicit security

automatically begins with an SSL connection the moment an FTPS client connects to an FTPS server.

FTPS (Implicit

TLS)In implicit security, the FTPS

[5]server defines a specific port for the client (990) to use for secure connections. Implicit security

automatically begins with a TLS connection the moment an FTP client connects to an FTP server.

HTTPRetrieve a file using HTTP

[6]. FIelds are provided for the server name and logon credentials.

HTTPSRetrieve a file using HTTPS

[7]. Fields are provided for the server name and logon credentials. Use this method to transfer data

between ServiceNow instances.

SCP The Secure Copy protocol (SCP) [8] securely transfers files between a local and a remote host or between two remote hosts, using

the Secure Shell (SSH) protocol..

FTP Extended Properties

The following table describes properties that are available for customizing your FTP data source. To enter these

properties, you must personalize the layout of your data source form, and add the Properties field. When you

specify more than one property, be sure to use a comma "," to separate them.

 Property name Description Example value Data

Source

connection.passive Sets the behavior for the FTP connection to establish a passive connection.

Defaults to false or active.

connection.passive=true FTP, FTPS

connection.timeout The number of milliseconds to wait before timing out the FTP connection attempt.

Defaults to 10 seconds.

connection.timeout=10000 FTP, FTPS

remove_file When this value is set to true, the remote file will be deleted after the import.

Defaults to false, or don't remove.

remove_file=true FTP, FTPS,

SFTP

rename_file When this property is set to true the remote file will be renamed to "<file

name>.imported". Defaults to false, or not to rename file.

rename_file=true FTP, FTPS,

SFTP

Page 179: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 179/196

Data Sources 178

JDBC Types

A JDBC data source is a data source that retrieves its data via a JDBC driver (usually type 4 'network'), and has a

requirement that the JDBC connection is available either directly from the ServiceNow instance (a VPN setup

required), or via a MID Server installed inside your firewall that can access the database port. Note that any JDBC

call from the MID server is never encrypted. Limit the rights available to the MID user whenever making JDBC calls

from a MID server.

JDBC connections are supported for the following databases:

 SQL Server Type Port

MySQL 3306

MS SQL Server 1433

Oracle 1521

Sybase 5000

DB2 Universal > 50000

A data source record for a JDBC connection looks like this:

Note: Oracle DATE fields will be loaded as ServiceNow datetime fields.

The following fields are available when you select a JDBC connection:

 Field Description

Name Unique name of this data source.

Import set table

Label

A label is a tag on a piece of data. Labels are logical, descriptive names that are localizable.

Import set table

name

ServiceNow uses the label you entered to construct a unique table name. This prevents namespace collision with an already

existing table.

Type Select JDBC from the drop-down list.

Use MID Server Select a MID Server to use to connect to this data source.

Page 180: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 180/196

Data Sources 179

Format Select one of the following formats (databases) from the list:

€ DB2 Universal

€ MySQL

€ Oracle

€ SQL Server

€ Sybase

Instance name To ensure connectivity, provide the instance name for a SQL Server that receives a new port number dynamically after each

reboot. This field only appears when SQLServer is selected as a data source format.

Database name Type the name of the database instance.

Database port Type the port number for the database.

Use integrated

authentication

Select this check box to allow the JDBC connection to use the ID of the user configured for the Windows MID Server service

for SQL Server authentication. For additional details, see SQL Server Integrated Authentication for Windows.

User name Type the user name for authentication on the database server.

Password Type the password for authentication on the database server.

Server Type the name of the server from which the data will be imported.

Query Select the type of query to run: All rows from Table or Specific SQL. If you select to run a SQL statement, the SQL statement

field appears.

Query timeout Specify the number of seconds the JDBC driver will wait for a query (SELECT) to complete. Zero means no timeout. If timeout

is exceeded, the integration considers the JDBC result inaccessible and places it in an error state.

Connection

timeout

Specify the number of seconds before MID Server connection cache pool closes and removes it from the pool. Zero means no

timeout.

Table name Type the name of the table from which the data is being exported.

SQL statement Type a SQL statement to extract the desired data from the database.

Use last run

datetime

This selection controls the amount of data that is retrieved from a database during an import run. If this check box is unselected,

then all rows in the table specified are imported, every time. You might want to use this setting if this is a one-time import, or if 

all the data in the target table is new. If this check box is selected, two additional fields appear, enabling you to select a datetime

value to limit imported data to delta values only.

Last run datetime The datetime value in this field is automatically populated from the database field you select below and represents the latest

value from the previous run. This value acts as a dynamic filter to restrict the number of records retrieved to those records that

have changed since the data source's last runtime.

Last run database

field

Select the field name from the source table that will be used as the filter in the next run.

SQL Statement Requirements

JDBC queries that run SQL statements must specify a column name. For example, this query specifies the column

name ServerID.

Select Distinct 'server_name:' + CONVERT(VarChar, lg.ResourceID)  As 

'ServerID'

,LastHWScan

,Account0

,Category0

Fromv_GS_WORKSTATION_STATUSsInner Join

v_GS_LocalGroupMembers0lg

On s.ResourceID = lg.ResourceID

WhereType0 = 'Local'

 And  Category0 = 'SystemAccount'

Page 181: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 181/196

Data Sources 180

JDBC Connection Settings

You can control how ServiceNow communicates with a JDBC data source by adding the following properties.

 Name Description

glide.jdbcprobeloader.retry The number of times a JDBC probe loader attempts to process data returning from a JDBC data source. Sleeps

on the value defined in "glide.jdbcprobeloader.retry_millis" between retries.

€ Type: integer

€ Default value: 60

€ Location: Add the property

glide.jdbcprobeloader.retry_millis How many milliseconds a JDBC probe loader waits in between retry attempts to process data from a JDBC data

source.

€ Type: integer

€ Default value: 5000

€ Location: Add the property

LDAP Types

Note:  It is unusual that you will configure an LDAP data source directly.

An LDAP data source is automatically created when configuring your instance to integrate with LDAP. For detailed

information on integrating LDAP with your ServiceNow instance, see LDAP Integration. A data source record for

LDAP looks like this:

The following LDAP fields are provided:

 Field Description

Name Unique name of this data source.

Import set table

Label

A label is a tag on a piece of data. Labels are logical, descriptive names that are localizable.

Import set table

name

ServiceNow uses the label you entered to construct a unique table name. This prevents namespace collision with an already

existing table.

Type Select LDAP from the drop-down list.

LDAP target Select a target from the list of your LDAP OU definitions.

Page 182: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 182/196

Data Sources 181

References

[1] http:/   /  www. zvon. org/  xxl/  XPathTutorial/  General/  examples. html

[2] http:/   /  en. wikipedia. org/  wiki/  FTPS''

[3] http:/   /  en. wikipedia. org/  wiki/  SFTP

[4] http:/   /  en. wikipedia. org/  wiki/  File_Transfer_Protocol

[5] http:/   /  en. wikipedia. org/  wiki/  FTPS

[6] http:/   /  en. wikipedia. org/  wiki/  HTTP[7] http:/   /  en. wikipedia. org/  wiki/  HTTPS

[8] http:/   /  en. wikipedia. org/  wiki/  Secure_copy

Scheduling Data Imports

Import Sets

€ Importing Data Using Import Sets

€ Using the Coalesce Field

€ Importing from Another ServiceNow Instance

€ Data Sources

€ Adding JDBC Drivers for Data Sources not Supported in Out-of-Box Systems

€ SQL Server Integrated Authentication for Windows

€ Viewing the Import Log

€ Import Run History

€ Scheduling Data Imports

€ Web Proxy

€ Creating New Transform Maps

€ Transform Map Scripts

€ Import Set Scheduled Cleanup

€ Troubleshooting Import Set Performance

Overview

Scheduled Imports make it is possible to specify that certain import operations should occur at some regular interval.

If a remote datasource is chosen then it will be refreshed via the remote connection prior to the import operation. To

create a Scheduled Data Import navigate to System Import Sets > Administration > Scheduled Imports.

Sample Schedule Data Import record

Scripting Options

Scheduled Import Pre and Post scripts have access to the following

JavaScript objects:

Page 183: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 183/196

Scheduling Data Imports 182

 Object Description

cancel Set this object to true to stop the import action.

glide.scheduled_import.stop_on_error Set this object to true to stop the import process when the parent scheduled import generates an error

map Specify the transform map you want the scheduled import to use. The transform map must be an existing

GlideRecord object.

data_source Specify the data source you want the scheduled import to use.The data source must be an existing

GlideRecord object.

Cancelling Out of a Scheduled Import

Use the Pre-script field to evaluate the conditions of the import and determine whether to cancel the import process.

To cancel the import process use the following call:

cancel = true;

Canceling dependent Scheduled Imports

One import set can depend on the results of another import set. Use the following code to stop the current import set

when the parent import set generates an error:

glide.scheduled_import.stop_on_error = true;

Specifying a Transform Map

Typically, you define the transform map as part of the data source. If you want to override the data source transform

map and use another one in certain conditions, you can use the following call:

map = "LDAP User Import";

Specifying a Data Source

Typically, you define the data source with the Scheduled Data Import record. If you want to override this data source

and use another data source in certain conditions, you can use the following call:

data_source = "Example LDAP Users";

Page 184: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 184/196

Creating New Transform Maps 183

Creating New Transform Maps

Import Sets

€ Importing Data Using Import Sets

€ Using the Coalesce Field€ Importing from Another ServiceNow Instance

€ Data Sources

€ Adding JDBC Drivers for Data Sources not Supported in Out-of-Box Systems

€ SQL Server Integrated Authentication for Windows

€ Viewing the Import Log

€ Import Run History

€ Scheduling Data Imports

€ Web Proxy

€ Creating New Transform Maps

€ Transform Map Scripts

€ Import Set Scheduled Cleanup

€ Troubleshooting Import Set Performance

Overview

Transform maps in the import process

A transform map is a set of field maps that determine the relationships

between fields in an import set and fields in an existing ServiceNow

table (such as Incidents [incident] or Users [sys_user]). After transform

maps have been defined they can be reused for mapping data from an

import set to a ServiceNow table.The Transform Maps module enables an administrator to define

destinations for imported data on any ServiceNow tables. Transform

mapping can be as simple as a drag and drop operation to specify

linking between source fields on an import set table and destination

fields on any ServiceNow table. Use transform mapping to map source

and destination fields dynamically.

Creating New Transform Maps

Every import operation to a ServiceNow production table requires at least one transform map that will be associated

with an import set. The transform map specifies the data relationships between the import set and the target table.

Every transformation requires that you either create a new transform map or select an existing one.

To create a new transform map, navigate to System Import Sets > Create Transform Map and fill in the transform

map fields.

Page 185: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 185/196

Creating New Transform Maps 184

Transform Map Fields

The Transform Map form has these fields.

 Field Input Value

Name Enter a user-friendly label for identifying the transform map.

Source table Select the import table containing the raw import set data. An import table is any table that extends the Import Set Row

[sys_import_set_row] table.

Active Select whether the transform map is available for use.

Run Business Rules Select whether to run business rules while the transformation inserts or updates data into the target table.

Enforce Mandatory

Fields

Select whether to enforce mandatory fields on the target table.

Copy Empty Fields Select whether to clear fields with existing values when an incoming field contains an empty value. See Using NULL as a

Field Value for information on how to import empty values.

Created Lists the transform map creation date. This field is automatically populated.

Target table Select the table where you want transformed data to be placed.

Order Enter the order in which to apply transform maps in the event that more than one map fits the conditions. ServiceNow runs

transform maps from lowest to highest Order.

Run Script Select whether to display the Script field. See transform map script for special variables available to transform map scripts.

Script Enter the transform map script you want to use to transform field values in the source table to the target table. ServiceNow

runs the transform map script in addition to any Field Maps.

Field Maps Use this related list to add one or more field maps. ServiceNow runs the transform Field Maps in addition to any transform

script.

Transform scripts Use this related list to add one or more transform map scripts. A transform script allows you to apply extra business logic a

specified stage of the transformation.

The sample User import transform map looks like this.

Sample transform map record

Using NULL as a Field Value

The string NULL has a particular role in the code for the ServiceNow

platform and is a reserved word. It should not be used as a field value

in import set transform maps or anywhere in the First name or Last

name fields. The reserved word is NULL in all capital letters. A field

with the value Null or null, for example, is acceptable. NULL

should be used only to clear out a particular field.

Creating a Field Map

Field maps establish a relationship between a field in an import set

table and a field in the target table. The field map determines what

values from the source table the transformation adds to the target table.

To create a field map:

1. Navigate to System Import Sets > Transform Maps.

2. Select the transform map to which you want to add a field mapping.

3. From the Field Maps related list, click New. Enter the field map fields.

4. Click Save.

Page 186: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 186/196

Creating New Transform Maps 185

5. Repeat steps 3-4 for each field mapping.

6. Click Update.

Field Map Fields

The field map form has these fields.

 Field Input Value

Source table Displays the table where the raw import set data is loaded (the source for the transformation). This field is automatically populated

from the transform map.

Source field Select the field on the source table to be transformed. This may be blank if the Source table only contains raw data.

Map Displays the transform map that uses this field mapping. This field is automatically populated.

Date format This field is available if the target field is a date or date-time field. This field specifies the date format of the source field. See

Changing the Date Format.

Choice action This field is available if the target field is a choice list or reference field. This field specifies what to do if the import set contains a

reference or choice value other than those available. Select one of these options:

€ create: Create a new choice or record in the reference table.

€ ignore: Ignore the new value from the source table.

€ reject: Skip the entire row (record) containing the new value and continue to the next row.

Use source

script

Select this check box to use a script instead of the Source field.

Source script Enter a script to determine the source of this field mapping instead of the Source field. The script should return the answer

variable. For example, this source script combines information from multiple sources into a single value. See Using a Script to

Calculate a Source Value.

Target table Select the table where the data will be placed after it is transformed.

Target field Select the field where the values from the source field will be stored.

Referenced

value field

name

Select the column name (not field label) in the reference table where the transform map searches for values that match entries in

the Source field. The Referenced value field name is present only when the Target field is a reference field.

The transform map compares the Source field value to the values in the specified reference table column. If the reference table

column contains a value that matches the Source field, the transform map places a reference to that record into the Target field.

If the reference table does not contain a matching value, the transform map creates a record in the reference table for the new

value, and then places a reference to the Sys ID of that record into the Target field.

If the Referenced value field name is blank, the transform map compares the Source field values with the Display Value from

the reference table. The same processing occurs: if a match is found, the transform map places a reference to the record into the

Target field. If no match is found, the transform map creates a record in the reference table and then places a reference to the

record into the Target field.

For example, in the LDAP User Import transform map, there is a mapping for the u_l field to the location field of the target User

[sys_user] table. The location field in the User table is a reference field to the Location [cmn_location] table.

If the Referenced value field name is blank, the transform map compares the Source field values to the display value (the name

column) for the Location table. Suppose the source u_l field contains the value "100 Park Boulevard, San Diego, CA". In this case,

the Location table contains a record with the same value in the name column, and the transform map places a reference to this

record into the Target table.

If the Referenced value field name contains a different column name, such as city, then the transform map looks for the value

"100 Park Boulevard, San Diego, CA" in the city column instead of the name column.

Coalesce Select this checkbox to match records in the source table to existing records in the target table. When true, the import set

application attempts to match source values to existing target values. When false, the import set application always creates new

records for each transformation. If multiple fields are set to coalesce, all coalesce values are used to match an existing record. If 

two fields are set for coalescing and a matching value is found on one of the coalescing fields but not on the other, a new record is

inserted.

Page 187: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 187/196

Creating New Transform Maps 186

Coalesce

empty fields

Select this check box to match an empty source field value to an empty target field value. For example, the User transform map

coalesces on the email field. With this option is selected, a source record containing an empty email address coalesces to a target

record containing an empty email address.

Coalesce case

sensitive

Select this check box to have case sensitive coalesce values result in the creation of new records. By default, values marked as

Coalesce are used in a case insensitive lookup for existing records. Case insensitive records only update existing records and do

not cause the creation of new records.

A completed field map record with coalescence enabled might look like this:

Sample field mapping

Mapping Options

The mapping of fields can be done in a number of ways depending on

the circumstances of the import and whether data must be transformed

prior to transformation onto a production table. It is also important to

note that any given import operation may require taking advantage of 

multiple mapping methods, and these methods can be readily used in conjunction with one another.

Automatic Mapping Utility

The simplest mapping method is where all of the field names of the import sets match the names of the fields on the

production tables onto which the data will be transformed. In this case, simply click Auto map matching fields in

the related list in the Table Transform Map form and confirm proper matching. If there are any discrepancies in

terms of how fields were automatically matched, these can easily be corrected using the mapping assist utility. When

all fields are matched properly, click Transform in the related lists to begin transforming data onto the destination

table.

Mapping Assist UtilityThe mapping assist utility provides a visually intuitive environment for specifying mapping between import set fields

and production table fields. With the mapping assist utility it is possible to map a single source field (field on an

import set table) to multiple destination fields (fields on a production table).

Mapping assist utility

Changing the Date Format

If the date format of the source field does not match the format of the

target field, you can set a date format mapping to transform dates from

one format to another. For example, this mapping specifies that the

date format of the CSV source file uses the MM-dd-yyyy format.

Sample date field mapping

Date format options include:

Page 188: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 188/196

Creating New Transform Maps 187

Date format options

 Date Format Description

dd-MM-yyyy Day-month-year

dd-MM-yyyy hh:mm:ss Day-month-year hours-minutes-seconds

dd-MM-yyyy hh:mm:ss z Day-month-year hours-minutes-seconds timezone

MM-dd-yyyy Month-day-year

MM-dd-yyyy hh:mm:ss Month-day-year hours-minutes-seconds

MM-dd-yyyy hh:mm:ss z Month-day-year hours-minutes-seconds timezone

yyyy-dd-MM Year-day-month

yyyy-MM-dd Year-month-day

yyyy-MM-dd hh:mm:ss Year-month-day hours-minutes-seconds

You can specify a custom date format using HH to denote 24 hour time. Converting from a 24 hour to 12 hour date

format may cause times from 12:00 to 12:59 to be formatted as 00:00.

Mapping to a Duration Field

ServiceNow duration fields use a special data type that lists the number of milliseconds the duration value is. To map

import data to a duration field use one of the following methods to transform source values into a duration.

€ Calculate the duration from a start and end date

€ Convert an existing duration value into a ServiceNow duration value

Calculating a Duration Value from a Start and End Date

If the import source has a start and end date, you can calculate a duration with JavaScript.

1. Navigate to System Import Sets > Transform Maps.

2. Select the transform map you want to calculate a duration value. For example, the Notification transform map

that imports into the Incident table.

3. Select the Run script checkbox.

4. Enter JavaScript to transform the start and end dates into a duration. See the sample script.

5. Click Update.

This sample script transforms the source.u_start and source.u_end fields to a duration value in the target.duration

field. Change the field names to match your source and target fields as needed.

target.duration =  gs.dateDiff(source.u_start.getDisplayValue(),

source.u_end.getDisplayValue(), false);

Page 189: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 189/196

Creating New Transform Maps 188

Convert a Duration Value into a ServiceNow Duration Value

If the import source already contains a start date and a duration value, you can convert the existing duration into a

ServiceNow duration. For example, you might have a Excel data source that lists a duration in seconds. ServiceNow

expects durations to have millisecond values.

1. Navigate to System Import Sets > Transform Maps.

2. Select the transform map you want to calculate a duration value. For example, the Notification transform map

that imports into the Incident table.

3. Select the Run script checkbox.

4. Enter JavaScript to convert existing duration value into a ServiceNow duration value. See the sample script.

5. Click Update.

This sample script converts a duration in seconds (from the source.u_duration field) to a duration in milliseconds (in

the target.duration field). Change the field names to match your source and target fields as needed.

//Transform the value in source.u_duration from seconds to milliseconds

target.duration.setDateNumericValue(source.u_duration *1000);

This sample script converts a duration already in milliseconds (from the source.u_duration field) to a ServiceNow

duration (in the target.duration field). Change the field names to match your source and target fields as needed.

//Transform the value in source.u_duration to ServiceNow format

target.duration.setDateNumericValue(source.u_duration);

Using a Script to Calculate a Source Value

Administrators may want to use a source script instead of the Source field when:

€ The source value is not in the format for the mapped target value.

€ You want to lookup a value before mapping to the target field.

€ The source value must be computed from multiple fields.

€ You need to create a compounded or calculated coalesce value in the target field.

For example, this source script computes the value of the user_name field when it is blank in the source.

Sample source field script

A source script expects the calculated value to be set in the global

variable answer.

Mapping Binary or BLOB Fields

ServiceNow uses a special process to import binary and binary large

object (BLOB) data from JDBC data sources. All binary data isautomatically converted into a record in the Attachment Record [sys_attachment] table before the transformation

occurs. The import set table only stores the attachment record's sys_id value in the import table field instead of the

actual binary value. For example, suppose you use a JDBC data source to import data from a CA Service Desk 

system. Because Service Desk stores each record's key value as binary data, when you import the Service Desk key

values into a ServiceNow table, the ServiceNow field only contains a system ID reference to the corresponding

binary data in the Attachment Record [sys_attachment] table rather than the actual binary data.

Transform maps can access the attachment using the GlideRecord programming API in an onAfter script. The script

needs to run in an onAfter event because the target.sys_id object is only available after the data is placed in the

import set table. For example, to map the resultant attachment to the target transform record, you can use the

following script.

Page 190: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 190/196

Creating New Transform Maps 189

var agr = new GlideRecord("sys_attachment");

agr.addQuery("sys_id", source.u_blob_field); // the source field needs

to be mapped to the source that is the BLOB

agr.query();

if (agr.next()) {

  agr.table_name = "cmdb_ci"; // the target table of the transform map

  agr.table_sys_id = target.sys_id; // the target record 

  agr.content_type = source.u_contentype; // the content type string if 

 available,

// this becomes the mime

encoding when clicking on an attachment link

  agr.update(); // finally, move/re-attach the attachment to the target

 row

}

If you are mapping directly to the db_image table, run the following onAfter script to get the image to display:

var strTemp = source.u_file_name;

var fType = strTemp.substr(-3);

var iCont = "";

if (fType == 'jpg') {

  iCont = 'jpeg';

} else {

  iCont = fType;

}

var agr = new GlideRecord("sys_attachment");

agr.addQuery("sys_id", source.u_blob_field);

agr.query();

if (agr.next()) {

  agr.table_name = "ZZ_YYdb_image";

  agr.table_sys_id = target.sys_id;

  agr.content_type = 'image/' + iCont;

  agr.file_name = 'image';

  agr.update();}

Using Multiple Transform Maps

Multiple transform maps can be applied to a single data source. One import set row is created per transform map.

This behavior can cause a large number of temporary records to be generated.

Page 191: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 191/196

Article Sources and Contributors 190

Article Sources and ContributorsUsing Forms  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=169077 Contributors: Cheryl.dolan, Davida.hughes, Emily.partridge, Guy.yedwab, Joe.Westrich, Joseph.messerschmidt,

Phillip.salzman, Rachel.sienko, Wallymarx

Personalizing Forms  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=159673 Contributors: CapaJC, Emily.partridge, G.yedwab, Guy.yedwab, Joe.Westrich, Joseph.messerschmidt,

Phillip.salzman, Rachel.sienko, Swood, Vhearne

Personalizing Lists  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=163876 Contributors: CapaJC, David.Bailey, Emily.partridge, G.yedwab, Gabriel.finney, Guy.yedwab,

Joseph.messerschmidt, Mark.stanger, Peter.smith, Rachel.sienko, Steve.wood, Swood, Vhearne

Creating New Fields  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=122942 Contributors: Cheryl.dolan, Guy.yedwab, Joe.Westrich, Joseph.messerschmidt, Steve.wood, Vaughn.romero

Creating a Custom Application  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=162393 Contributors: Cheryl.dolan, Rachel.sienko

Administering Application Menus and Modules  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=160983 Contributors: CapaJC, Cheryl.dolan, G.yedwab, Guy.yedwab, Jared.laethem,

Joseph.messerschmidt, Mark.stanger, Phillip.salzman, Rachel.sienko, Steve.wood, Suzannes, Swood, Vaughn.romero, Vhearne

Creating a Custom Table  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=167542 Contributors: CapaJC, Cheryl.dolan, Emily.partridge, G.yedwab, Guy.yedwab, Joseph.messerschmidt,

Mark.stanger, Rachel.sienko, Steve.wood, Swood, Vaughn.romero, Vhearne

Introduction to Assets and Configuration  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=123075 Contributors: George.rawlins, Gflewis, Guy.yedwab, Joseph.messerschmidt,

Steve.wood, Swood, Sydney.nickell

Adding Existing Gauges to a Homepage  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=148840 Contributors: CapaJC, Cheryl.dolan, G.yedwab, Guy.yedwab, Jessi.graves,

Joe.Westrich, Joseph.messerschmidt, Mark.stanger, Neola, Rob.woodbyrne, Swood, Vhearne, Wallymarx

Creating Users and Associating to a Group  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=170029 Contributors: CapaJC, Cheryl.dolan, Guy.yedwab, Joe.Westrich,

Joseph.messerschmidt, Neola, Phillip.salzman, Steve.wood, Suzannes, Swood, Vaughn.romero, Vhearne

Creating Groups  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=159708 Contributors: CapaJC, Cheryl.dolan, Emily.partridge, G.yedwab, Guy.yedwab, Jeremiah.hall,

Joseph.messerschmidt, Neola, Peter.smith, Suzannes, Vhearne

Creating Roles  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=144555 Contributors: Cheryl.dolan, Emily.partridge, Guy.yedwab, Joseph.messerschmidt, Neola, Suzannes, Swood

Role Delegation  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=144549 Contributors: CapaJC, Emily.partridge, Joseph.messerschmidt, Neola, Pat.Casey, Swood

Using Access Control Rules  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=162076 Contributors: CapaJC, G.yedwab, Grant.hulbert, Guy.yedwab, Joseph.messerschmidt, Neola,

Phillip.salzman, Rachel.sienko, Steve.wood, Suzannes, Swood, Vaughn.romero

High Security Settings  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=168487 Contributors: Cheryl.dolan, David Loo, David.Bailey, Emily.partridge, G.yedwab, Gadi.yedwab,

Guy.yedwab, Jason.lau, John.andersen, Joseph.messerschmidt, Neola, Peter.smith, P hillip.salzman, Rachel.sienko, Steve.wood, Swood, Vaughn.romero, Wallymarx

Performance Metrics  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=147815 Contributors: CapaJC, Emily.partridge, G.yedwab, Joseph.messerschmidt, Neola, Pat.Casey, Rachel.sienko,

Steve.wood, Swood, Wallymarx

Creating Reports  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=162310 Contributors: CapaJC, Cheryl.dolan, Davida.hughes, Emily.partridge, G.yedwab, Guy.yedwab, Jared.laethem,

Joseph.messerschmidt, Mark.stanger, Michael.randall, Mike.malcangio, Peter.smith, Rob.woodbyrne, Steve.wood, Suzannes, Swood, Vaughn.romero, Vhearne

Defining an SLA  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=168240 Contributors: David.Bailey, Davida.hughes, Emily.partridge, Guy.yedwab, Joseph.messerschmidt,

Rachel.sienko, Steve.wood, Suzannes, Swood

Creating an SLA Workflow  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=157414 Contributors: Davida.hughes, Emily.partridge, G.yedwab, Guy.yedwab, Joseph.messerschmidt,

Nick.roberts, Rachel.sienko, Steve.wood, Suzannes, Swood, Voytek.blonski

Events and Email Notification  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=149121 Contributors: CapaJC, Chuck.tomasi, G.yedwab, Grant.hulbert, Guy.yedwab, Ishrath.razvi,

Jgrinter, Joe.Westrich, Joseph.messerschmidt, Mark.stanger, Neola, Rachel.sienko, Steve.wood, Swood, Vaughn.romero, Vhearne

Using the Knowledge Base  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=172037 Contributors: Cheryl.dolan, David.Bailey, Rachel.sienko

Creating Knowledge  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=168450 Contributors: Cheryl.dolan, David.Bailey

Configuring Knowledge Properties  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=130302 Contributors: Cheryl.dolan, Mhobson

Defining Catalog Items  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=150401 Contributors: CapaJC, David.Bailey, G.yedwab, Guy.yedwab, Joseph.messerschmidt, Pat.Casey,

Rachel.sienko, Rob.woodbyrne, Steve.wood, Swood, Vhearne, Wallymarx

Record Producer  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=164240 Contributors: CapaJC, Cheryl.dolan, David.Bailey, Eric.jacobson, Guy.yedwab, Jared.laethem, Jessi.graves,

John.roberts, Joseph.messerschmidt, Rachel.sienko, Suzannes, Vhearne

Using Service Catalog Variables  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=157012 Contributors: CapaJC, Cheryl.dolan, David.Bailey, Emily.partridge, Guy.yedwab,Joseph.messerschmidt, Pat.Casey, Rachel.sienko, Rob.woodbyrne, Steve.wood, Swood, Vhearne

Service Catalog Order Guides  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=152551 Contributors: CapaJC, Cheryl.dolan, David.Bailey, Gadi.yedwab, Guy.yedwab, John.andersen,

Joseph.messerschmidt, Pat.Casey, Rachel.sienko, Swood, Vhearne

Defining a Service Catalog Workflow  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=153794 Contributors: David.Bailey, G.yedwab, Guy.yedwab, Ishrath.razvi, Joe.Westrich,

Joseph.messerschmidt, Peter.smith, Rachel.sienko, Russ.sarbora, Steve.wood, Swood

System Update Sets  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=168577 Contributors: Annmarie, Brozi, CapaJC, Cheryl.dolan, Emily.partridge, G.yedwab, Guy.yedwab,

Jared.laethem, Jerrod.bennett, Jessi.graves, Joseph.messerschmidt, Michael.hoefer, Peter.smith, Rachel.sienko, Steve.wood, Suzannes, Swood, Vhearne

Getting Started with Update Sets  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=157852 Contributors: Cheryl.dolan, Emily.partridge, G.yedwab, Guy.yedwab, Joseph.messerschmidt,

Rachel.sienko, Steve.wood, Swood

Using Update Sets  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=158076 Contributors: Annmarie, CapaJC, Cesar. sandoval, Cheryl.dolan, Danijel.stanojevic, David Loo, Don.Goodliffe,

G.yedwab, Gadi.yedwab, Guy.yedwab, John.roberts, Joseph.messerschmidt, Michael.hoefer, Pat.Casey, Rachel.sienko, Steve.wood, Swood, Vhearne, Wallymarx

Transferring Update Sets  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=157854 Contributors: Emily.partridge, Joseph.messerschmidt, Rachel.sienko

Upgrades and the Release Cycle  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=169053 Contributors: Andrew.martin, Cheryl.dolan, Joseph.messerschmidt, Nicholas.roberts,

Rachel.sienko, Vaughn.romero

Import Sets  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=136241 Contributors: CapaJC, David Loo, Emily.partridge, G.yedwab, Guy.yedwab, Ishrath.razvi, Jared.laethem, Jessi.graves,

Joseph.messerschmidt, Rachel.sienko, Rob.woodbyrne, Steve.wood, Swood, Vhearne

Page 192: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 192/196

Article Sources and Contributors 191

Using the Coalesce Field  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=169276 Contributors: CapaJC, Gflewis, Guy.yedwab, Richard.senecal, Steve.wood, Swood, Vaughn.romero,

Vhearne

Data Sources  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=167174 Contributors: CapaJC, David Loo, David.Bailey, David.dixon, G.yedwab, Guy.yedwab, Jared.laethem, Jessi.graves,

Jonathan.sparks, Joseph.messerschmidt, Norris.merritt, Pinnacle ls, Rob.woodbyrne, Steve.wood, Swood, Valor, Vaughn.romero, Vhearne, Wallymarx

Scheduling Data Imports  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=134474 Contributors: CapaJC, David Loo, Guy.yedwab, Jared.laethem, John.andersen, Joseph.messerschmidt,

Rob.woodbyrne, Steve.wood, Swood, Vaughn.romero, Vhearne

Creating New Transform Maps  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?oldid=164102 Contributors: CapaJC, Cheryl.dolan, Chuck.tomasi, David Loo, Emily.partridge, G.yedwab,

Gabriel.finney, Guy.yedwab, Jared.laethem, Joseph.messerschmidt, Neola, Rob.woodbyrne, Steve.wood, Swood, Vaughn.romero, Vhearne

Page 193: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 193/196

Image Sources, Licenses and Contributors 192

Image Sources, Licenses and ContributorsImage:ResponseClock.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:ResponseClock.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:FormElements.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:FormElements.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:Back.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Back.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:FormTitleMenu.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:FormTitleMenu.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:Attachments.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Attachments.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:Previous.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Previous.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:Next.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Next.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:ToggleTabs.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:ToggleTabs.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:FormTitleBar.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:FormTitleBar.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:FormContextMenu.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:FormContextMenu.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:Reference_icon.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Reference_icon.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko, Rob.woodbyrne

Image:FieldIndicator1.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:FieldIndicator1.png  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC

Image:Expand.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Expand.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:Collapse.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Collapse.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:DeleteCondition.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:DeleteCondition.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:Embedded.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Embedded.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:Simultaneous_update.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Simultaneous_update.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:Warning.gif   Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Warning.gif  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC

Image:InsertMenuItem.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:InsertMenuItem.png  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC, Rachel.sienko

Image:Dirty_form.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Dirty_form.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:PersonalizeFormLayout.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:PersonalizeFormLayout.png  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC, Vaughn.romeroImage:SlushBucketView.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:SlushBucketView.png  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC

Image:InsertProperty1.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:InsertProperty1.png  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC, Guy.yedwab, Swood

Image:RelatedList.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:RelatedList.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:CustomerUpdateForm.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:CustomerUpdateForm.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:CustomerUpdateIndicator.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:CustomerUpdateIndicator.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:FormUpdatePreference.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:FormUpdatePreference.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:PersonalizeListLayout1.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:PersonalizeListLayout1.png  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC, Swood

Image:PersonalizeListLayout.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:PersonalizeListLayout.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:Personalize List Calculation.gif   Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Personalize_List_Calculation.gif  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:List control2.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:List_control2.png  License: unknown Contributors: Don.Goodliffe, Steve.wood, Swood

Image:save_row.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Save_row.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:InsertNewRow.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:InsertNewRow.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:List control3.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:List_control3.png  License: unknown Contributors: Don.Goodliffe, Steve.wood, Swood

Image:List control4.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:List_control4.png  License: unknown Contributors: Don.Goodliffe, Steve.wood, Swood

Image:List control5.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:List_control5.png  License: unknown Contributors: Don.Goodliffe, Swood

Image:Personalize List UI Action.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Personalize_List_UI_Action.png  License: unknown Contributors: Don.Goodliffe, Swood

Image:AddNewField.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:AddNewField.png  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC, Steve.wood

Image:Mandatory_Fields_Create3.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Mandatory_Fields_Create3.png  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:DefaultValueConstant.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:DefaultValueConstant.png  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC

Image:Default value2.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Default_value2.png  License: unknown Contributors: Don.Goodliffe

Image:DefaultValue.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:DefaultValue.png  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC

Image:DependentValue.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:DependentValue.png  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC

Image:UniqueNumber1.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:UniqueNumber1.png  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC

Image:ApplicationTables.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:ApplicationTables.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:ApplicationsPicker.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:ApplicationsPicker.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:ConflictDialog.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:ConflictDialog.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:MoveFile.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:MoveFile.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:ApplicationFile.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:ApplicationFile.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:UpdateSet.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:UpdateSet.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:DeleteApplication.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:DeleteApplication.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:DeleteApplicationFinished.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:DeleteApplicationFinished.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:RestoreRecords.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:RestoreRecords.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:ApplicationCategory1.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:ApplicationCategory1.png  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC

Image:Application.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Application.png  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC, Guy.yedwab, Rachel.sienko

Image:Module.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Module.png  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC, Guy.yedwab

Image:ExternalLink1.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:ExternalLink1.png  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC, Guy.yedwab, Swood

Image:RequestTable.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:RequestTable.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:CreateModule.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:CreateModule.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:AutoNumber.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:AutoNumber.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:TableSecurity.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:TableSecurity.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:ExtendTable.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:ExtendTable.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:NewCMDBclass.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:NewCMDBclass.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:Table Creator.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Table_Creator.png  License: unknown Contributors: Steve.wood

Image:Newtable1.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Newtable1.png  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC

Image:Related Items field.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Related_Items_field.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab

Image:Plus.gif   Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Plus.gif  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC

Image:CI Relationship Page.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:CI_Relationship_Page.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab, Steve.wood

Page 194: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 194/196

Image Sources, Licenses and Contributors 193

Image:Flat layout.gif   Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Flat_layout.gif  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab

Image:Flat tree view.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Flat_tree_view.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab, Steve.wood

Image:Tree layout.gif   Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Tree_layout.gif  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab

Image:Tree view.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Tree_view.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab, Steve.wood

Image:Bsm.gif   Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Bsm.gif  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab

Image:Relationship map.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Relationship_map.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab, Steve.wood

Image:CI_Related_Lists.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:CI_Related_Lists.png  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:Add content.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Add_content.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rob.woodbyrne

Image:Add.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Add.png  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC

Image:Sections close.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Sections_close.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rob.woodbyrne

Image:Mk gauge btn.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Mk_gauge_btn.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rob.woodbyrne

Image:Add to home btn.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Add_to_home_btn.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rob.woodbyrne

Image:New.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:New.png  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC

Image:Try it.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Try_it.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rob.woodbyrne

Image:Role Delegator1.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Role_Delegator1.png  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:Role Delegator Change.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Role_Delegator_Change.png  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:Role User Record.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Role_User_Record.png  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:Role Delegator List.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Role_Delegator_List.png  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:Role Audit.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Role_Audit.png  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:Role Delegation.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Role_Delegation.png  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:Role Change Request.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Role_Change_Request.png  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:acl_workflow.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Acl_workflow.png  License: unknown Contributors: Vaughn.romero

Image:acl_evaluate_permissions.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Acl_evaluate_permissions.png  License: unknown Contributors: Vaughn.romero

Image:acl_matching.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Acl_matching.png  License: unknown Contributors: Vaughn.romeroImage:Acl debug.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Acl_debug.png  License: unknown Contributors: Pat.Casey, Vaughn.romero

Image:Acl debug list.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Acl_debug_list.png  License: unknown Contributors: Pat.Casey, Vaughn.romero

Image:Caution-diamond.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Caution-diamond.png  License: unknown Contributors: John.roberts

Image:SecurityManagerDefault.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:SecurityManagerDefault.png  License: unknown Contributors: Neola

Image:sec_admin_role.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Sec_admin_role.png  License: unknown Contributors: David Loo

File:Icon-elevated.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Icon-elevated.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab

Image:welcome_header_lock.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Welcome_header_lock.png  License: unknown Contributors: David Loo, Steve.wood

Image:elev_select.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Elev_select.png  License: unknown Contributors: David Loo, Steve.wood

Image:elevated_header.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Elevated_header.png  License: unknown Contributors: David Loo, Steve.wood

Image:elevated_roles.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Elevated_roles.png  License: unknown Contributors: Phillip.salzman

Image:Highsecuritywarning.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Highsecuritywarning.png  License: unknown Contributors: Peter.smith, Steve.wood, Wallymarx

Image:Perf Metrics Add Content.gif   Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Perf_Metrics_Add_Content.gif  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC, Swood

Image:Perf Metrics Filter Buttons.gif   Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Perf_Metrics_Filter_Buttons.gif  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:Perf Metrics Database.gif   Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Perf_Metrics_Database.gif  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:Plugin.gif   Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Plugin.gif  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC

Image:Perf Metrics Discovery.gif   Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Perf_Metrics_Discovery.gif  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:Perf Metrics Disk Partitions1.gif   Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Perf_Metrics_Disk_Partitions1.gif  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:Business Services Disk Partitions.gif   Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Business_Services_Disk_Partitions.gif  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:Perf Metrics Disk Partitions2.gif   Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Perf_Metrics_Disk_Partitions2.gif  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:Perf Metrics Linux Stats.gif   Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Perf_Metrics_Linux_Stats.gif  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:Perf Metrics Logging.gif   Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Perf_Metrics_Logging.gif  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:Perf Metrics SQL.gif   Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Perf_Metrics_SQL.gif  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:Perf Metrics Node2.gif   Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Perf_Metrics_Node2.gif  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:Perf Metrics Servlet.gif   Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Perf_Metrics_Servlet.gif  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:New gray.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:New_gray.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rob.woodbyrne

Image:Expander icon.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Expander_icon.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rob.woodbyrne

Image:Optional other.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Optional_other.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab, Jared.laethem

Image:Optional other fall.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Optional_other_fall.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab

Image:Reporting - Multi group.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Reporting_-_Multi_group.png  License: unknown Contributors: Joseph.messerschmidt

Image:Reporting - Direct export.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Reporting_-_Direct_export.png  License: unknown Contributors: Joseph.messerschmidt

Image:Reporting - Export Details.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Reporting_-_Export_Details.png  License: unknown Contributors: Joseph.messerschmidt

Image:SLA Example.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:SLA_Example.png  License: unknown Contributors: G.yedwab, Guy.yedwab

Image:SLA Workflow.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:SLA_Workflow.png  License: unknown Contributors: G.yedwab, Guy.yedwab

Image:Test Incident.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Test_Incident.png  License: unknown Contributors: G.yedwab, Guy.yedwab

Image:Test SLA.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Test_SLA.png  License: unknown Contributors: G.yedwab, Guy.yedwab

Image:Test SLA2.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Test_SLA2.png  License: unknown Contributors: G.yedwab, Guy.yedwab

Image:Test Workflow.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Test_Workflow.png  License: unknown Contributors: G.yedwab

Image:Workflow Properties.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Workflow_Properties.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab, Steve.wood

Image:VariablePicker.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:VariablePicker.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab

Image:Variablepicker2.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Variablepicker2.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab

Image:Notification.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Notification.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab

Image:SLA Workflow2.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:SLA_Workflow2.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab

Image:SLA workflow3.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:SLA_workflow3.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab

Image:Workflow Actions.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Workflow_Actions.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab

Image:Service Catalog Request.gif   Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Service_Catalog_Request.gif  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:Incident Events.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Incident_Events.png  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:Change Request Global.gif   Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Change_Request_Global.gif  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Page 195: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 195/196

Image Sources, Licenses and Contributors 194

Image:Knowledge Base.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Knowledge_Base.png  License: unknown Contributors: Bgblkfly, Cheryl.dolan, Guy.yedwab

image:Book.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Book.png  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC, Guy.yedwab

Image:ArticleView.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:ArticleView.png  License: unknown Contributors: Cheryl.dolan

Image:Book.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Book.png  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC, Guy.yedwab

Image:HelpfulYes1.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:HelpfulYes1.png  License: unknown Contributors: Cheryl.dolan

Image:HelpfulNo1.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:HelpfulNo1.png  License: unknown Contributors: Cheryl.dolan

Image:KB_CreateIncident.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:KB_CreateIncident.png  License: unknown Contributors: Cheryl.dolan

Image:FiveStarRating.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:FiveStarRating.png  License: unknown Contributors: Cheryl.dolan

Image:KBFeedback_Flagged.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:KBFeedback_Flagged.png  License: unknown Contributors: Cheryl.dolan

Image:Knowledge_Form.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Knowledge_Form.png  License: unknown Contributors: Cheryl.dolan

Image:Icon-referencelookup.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Icon-referencelookup.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab

Image:Kb attach1.jpg  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Kb_attach1.jpg  License: unknown Contributors: John.roberts

Image:Kb attach2.jpg  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Kb_attach2.jpg  License: unknown Contributors: John.roberts

Image:InctoKno.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:InctoKno.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab, Steve.wood

Image:InctoKno2.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:InctoKno2.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab

Image:Cspc-new.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Cspc-new.png  License: unknown Contributors: David.Bailey

Image:Additional.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Additional.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab, Rachel.sienko

Image:recurring_price.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Recurring_price.png  License: unknown Contributors: Suzannes

Image:recurring_shop_cart.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Recurring_shop_cart.png  License: unknown Contributors: Suzannes

Image:recurring_price_rollup.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Recurring_price_rollup.png  License: unknown Contributors: Suzannes

Image:recurring_price_request_rollup.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Recurring_price_request_rollup.png  License: unknown Contributors: Suzannes

Image:Catalog_No_Quantity.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Catalog_No_Quantity.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko, Swood

Image:Catalog_Item_View_Quantity.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Catalog_Item_View_Quantity.png  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:Catalog_Item_Hide_Quantity.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Catalog_Item_Hide_Quantity.png  License: unknown Contributors: SwoodImage:CatalogQuantity1.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:CatalogQuantity1.png  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC, Guy.yedwab, Swood

Image:Variable personalize.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Variable_personalize.png  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC, Pat.Casey, Rachel.sienko, Swood

Image:Record Producer.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Record_Producer.png  License: unknown Contributors: Cheryl.dolan

Image:VariableDefinition.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:VariableDefinition.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:Variable help expanded.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Variable_help_expanded.png  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC, Guy.yedwab, Pat.Casey

Image:Var roles.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Var_roles.png  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC, David.Bailey, Guy.yedwab, Pat.Casey

Image:assignvariablerole.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Assignvariablerole.png  License: unknown Contributors: David.Bailey

Image:QuestionChoice.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:QuestionChoice.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:Cat_op.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Cat_op.png  License: unknown Contributors: Pat.Casey, Rachel.sienko

Image:Og text.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Og_text.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab, Pat.Casey, Rachel.sienko

Image:Og variable.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Og_variable.png  License: unknown Contributors: Pat.Casey

Image:Og rule.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Og_rule.png  License: unknown Contributors: Pat.Casey

Image:Og rule detail.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Og_rule_detail.png  License: unknown Contributors: Pat.Casey

Image:Og rule detail3.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Og_rule_detail3.png  License: unknown Contributors: Pat.Casey

Image:Og sample 1.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Og_sample_1.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab, Pat.Casey

Image:Og sample 2.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Og_sample_2.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab, Pat.Casey

Image:Og sample 4.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Og_sample_4.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab, Pat.Casey

Image:Og sample 5.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Og_sample_5.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab, Pat.Casey

Image:SCWorkflowForm.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:SCWorkflowForm.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab, Steve.wood

Image:SCWorkflowFormActivities.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:SCWorkflowFormActivities.png  License: unknown Contributors: David.Bailey

Image:Locked.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Locked.png  License: unknown Contributors: Steve.wood

Image:Variable Picker.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Variable_Picker.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab

Image:SCWorkflowForm1.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:SCWorkflowForm1.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab, Steve.wood

Image:SCWorkflowForm2.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:SCWorkflowForm2.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab, Steve.wood

Image:SCWorkflowForm3.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:SCWorkflowForm3.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab, Steve.wood

Image:SCWorkflowForm4.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:SCWorkflowForm4.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab, Steve.wood

Image:SCWorkflowExample.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:SCWorkflowExample.png  License: unknown Contributors: Guy.yedwab, Steve.wood

Image:HomepageUnload.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:HomepageUnload.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:updatesetapp.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Updatesetapp.png  License: unknown Contributors: G.yedwab

Image:Update set picker.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Update_set_picker.png  License: unknown Contributors: G.yedwab

Image:Us3.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Us3.png  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC, Don.Goodliffe

Image:UpdateSetSelectVersions.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:UpdateSetSelectVersions.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:UpdateSetCompare.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:UpdateSetCompare.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:UpdateSetRecord.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:UpdateSetRecord.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:ShowRecord.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:ShowRecord.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:ShowUpdate.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:ShowUpdate.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:UpdateSetsMerge.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:UpdateSetsMerge.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:Update_Sets_Collision_Report1.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Update_Sets_Collision_Report1.png  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:Update Set Collisions.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Update_Set_Collisions.png  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:Update Record.gif   Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Update_Record.gif  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:Us20.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Us20.png  License: unknown Contributors: CapaJC, Don.Goodliffe

Image:Uds1.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Uds1.png  License: unknown Contributors: G.yedwab

Image:Update Sets Preview.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Update_Sets_Preview.png  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:Update Sets Compare.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Update_Sets_Compare.png  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:Update_Sets_Preview1.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Update_Sets_Preview1.png  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:UpdateSetProblems.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:UpdateSetProblems.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:UpdateProblems.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:UpdateProblems.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Page 196: ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

8/18/2019 ServiceNow Admin Certification Book

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/servicenow-admin-certification-book 196/196

Image Sources, Licenses and Contributors 195

Image:Update_Set_Commit.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Update_Set_Commit.png  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:Update_Set_Commit_Confirm.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Update_Set_Commit_Confirm.png  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:Tick.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Tick.png  License: unknown Contributors: Mark.odonnell

Image:ReleaseCycle2011.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:ReleaseCycle2011.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:CheckRelease.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:CheckRelease.png  License: unknown Contributors: Rachel.sienko

Image:Upgrade email.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Upgrade_email.png  License: unknown Contributors: David Loo

Image:ImportsetTable.jpg  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:ImportsetTable.jpg  License: unknown Contributors: [email protected]

Image:ImportRW001.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:ImportRW001.png  License: unknown Contributors: David Loo, Rob.woodbyrne

Image:ImportSetList.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:ImportSetList.png  License: unknown Contributors: Jared.laethem

Image:ImportSetForm.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:ImportSetForm.png  License: unknown Contributors: David Loo, Jared.laethem

Image:Data Source File.gif   Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Data_Source_File.gif  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:File format.jpg  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:File_format.jpg  License: unknown Contributors: Jared.laethem

Image:Xls shot.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Xls_shot.png  License: unknown Contributors: Jared.laethem

Image:Csv alternate delimiter.jpg  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Csv_alternate_delimiter.jpg  License: unknown Contributors: David Loo

Image:Data source with properties field set.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Data_source_with_properties_field_set.png  License: unknown Contributors:

Jonathan.sparks

Image:JDBC shot.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:JDBC_shot.png  License: unknown Contributors: Jared.laethem, Steve.wood, Swood

Image:Data Source LDAP.gif   Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Data_Source_LDAP.gif  License: unknown Contributors: Swood

Image:Scheduled_Imports.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Scheduled_Imports.png  License: unknown Contributors: Steve.wood, Vaughn.romero

Image:import_process_transform.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Import_process_transform.png  License: unknown Contributors: Vaughn.romero

Image:transform_map_record.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Transform_map_record.png  License: unknown Contributors: Vaughn.romero

Image:field_map_record.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Field_map_record.png  License: unknown Contributors: Vaughn.romero

Image:Mapping_assist.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Mapping_assist.png  License: unknown Contributors: Vaughn.romero

Image:field_map_date_format.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Field_map_date_format.png  License: unknown Contributors: Vaughn.romero

Image:field_map_date_format_options.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Field_map_date_format_options.png  License: unknown Contributors: Vaughn.romero

Image:field_map_source_script.png  Source: http://wiki.servicenow.com/index.php?title=File:Field_map_source_script.png  License: unknown Contributors: Vaughn.romero